Wireless communication method and device

Abstract

The embodiment of the invention provides a wireless communication method and device. Multi-AP MLD joint channel detection and / or multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission and / or data sharing among multi-AP MLDs and / or non-AP MLD uninterrupted roaming can be achieved.

Description

Wireless communication method and device Technical Field

[0001] The present invention relates to the field of communications, and more specifically, to a method and device for wireless communications. Background Art

[0002] With the evolution of technology, the access point multi-link device (AP MLD) capability cannot meet transmission requirements. How to improve the AP MLD capability to meet transmission requirements has become a problem that needs to be solved.

[0003] Summary of the Invention

[0004] The embodiments of the present application provide a wireless communication method and device, which can implement multi-AP MLD joint channel detection and / or multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission and / or data sharing between multiple AP MLDs and / or non-AP MLD uninterrupted roaming.

[0005] In a first aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0006] The first AP MLD sends or receives a multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame;

[0007] The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, the frequency band information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the links and / or frequency bands for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection;

[0008] The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, and multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability.

[0009] In a second aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0010] The first non-AP MLD receives the first frame sent by the first AP MLD;

[0011] The first frame is sent by the first AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the first frame is an NDPA frame or a detection trigger frame;

[0012] The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, the frequency band information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the links and / or frequency bands for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection;

[0013] Wherein, in the case where the first frame is an NDPA frame, the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of an NDP frame sent subsequently;

[0014] Wherein, in the case that the first frame is a detection trigger frame, the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result.

[0015] According to a third aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0016] The first AP MLD sends first information to the first non-AP MLD;

[0017] The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, where s and w are both positive integers.

[0018] In a fourth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0019] The first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD receives the first information sent by the first access point multi-link device AP MLD;

[0020] The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, where s and w are both positive integers.

[0021] In a fifth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0022] A first access point multi-link device AP MLD sends a data sharing announcement frame to at least one AP MLD, wherein the first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and

[0023] The first AP MLD sends the shared data using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

[0024] In a sixth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0025] The second access point multi-link device AP MLD receives a data sharing announcement frame sent by the first AP MLD, wherein the first AP MLD and the second AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and

[0026] The second AP MLD receives the shared data sent by the first AP MLD using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

[0027] In a seventh aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0028] The first access point multi-link device AP MLD sends a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame to at least one AP MLD;

[0029] The first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, the at least one AP MLD and the first AP MLD jointly participate in multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes, and transmission parameters used by each AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

[0030] In an eighth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0031] The second access point multi-link device AP MLD receives the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame sent by the first AP MLD;

[0032] The first AP MLD and the second AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, the second AP MLD and the first AP MLD jointly participate in multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes, and transmission parameters used by each AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

[0033] In a ninth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0034] The first access point AP sends or receives a multi-AP detection announcement frame;

[0035] The multi-AP detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple APs perform channel detection, the time when multiple APs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple APs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple APs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple APs performing channel detection;

[0036] The first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, and the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0037] In a tenth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0038] The first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD receives the second frame sent by the first access point AP;

[0039] The second frame is sent by the first AP according to the information indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame, the first non-AP MLD is the non-AP MLD associated with the first AP in all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the first AP belongs to the second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the second frame is an empty data physical protocol data unit declaration NDPA frame or a detection trigger frame;

[0040] The multi-AP detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple APs perform channel detection, the time when multiple APs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple APs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple APs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple APs performing channel detection;

[0041] Wherein, in the case where the second frame is an NDPA frame, the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of a Null Data Physical Protocol Data Unit NDP frame sent subsequently;

[0042] Wherein, in the case that the second frame is a detection trigger frame, the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result.

[0043] In an eleventh aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0044] The first access point AP sends first information to the first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD;

[0045] The first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, the first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and s and w are both positive integers.

[0046] In a twelfth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0047] The first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD receives the first information sent by the first access point AP;

[0048] The first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, the first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and s and w are both positive integers.

[0049] In a thirteenth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0050] A first access point AP sends a data sharing announcement frame to at least one AP, wherein the first AP and the at least one AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device (AP) MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, and the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device (non-AP) MLD to which the shared data belongs; and

[0051] The first AP sends the shared data using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

[0052] In a fourteenth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0053] The second access point AP receives a data sharing announcement frame sent by the first AP, wherein the first AP and the second AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and

[0054] The second AP receives the shared data sent by the first AP using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

[0055] In a fifteenth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0056] The first access point AP sends a multi-AP transmission trigger frame to at least one AP;

[0057] In which, the first AP and the at least one AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, the at least one AP and the first AP jointly participate in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

[0058] In a sixteenth aspect, a wireless communication method is provided, the method comprising:

[0059] The second access point AP receives the multi-AP transmission trigger frame sent by the first AP;

[0060] In which, the first AP and the second AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, the second AP and the first AP jointly participate in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

[0061] In a seventeenth aspect, an AP MLD is provided, configured to execute the method in the first aspect.

[0062] Specifically, the AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the first aspect.

[0063] In an eighteenth aspect, a non-AP MLD is provided, which is used to execute the method in the second aspect.

[0064] Specifically, the non-AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the second aspect.

[0065] In a nineteenth aspect, an AP MLD is provided, which is used to execute the method in the third aspect.

[0066] Specifically, the AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the third aspect.

[0067] In a twentieth aspect, a non-AP MLD is provided, which is used to execute the method in the fourth aspect.

[0068] Specifically, the non-AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the fourth aspect.

[0069] In a twenty-first aspect, an AP MLD is provided, configured to execute the method in the fifth aspect.

[0070] Specifically, the AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the fifth aspect.

[0071] In the twenty-second aspect, an AP MLD is provided for executing the method in the sixth aspect.

[0072] Specifically, the AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the sixth aspect.

[0073] In a twenty-third aspect, an AP MLD is provided, which is used to execute the method in the seventh aspect.

[0074] Specifically, the AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the seventh aspect.

[0075] In a twenty-fourth aspect, an AP MLD is provided for executing the method in the eighth aspect.

[0076] Specifically, the AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the eighth aspect.

[0077] In the twenty-fifth aspect, an AP is provided for executing the method in the ninth aspect.

[0078] Specifically, the AP includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned ninth aspect.

[0079] In a twenty-sixth aspect, a non-AP MLD is provided for executing the method in the tenth aspect.

[0080] Specifically, the non-AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the tenth aspect.

[0081] In the twenty-seventh aspect, an AP is provided for executing the method in the above-mentioned eleventh aspect.

[0082] Specifically, the AP includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned eleventh aspect.

[0083] In the twenty-eighth aspect, a non-AP MLD is provided for executing the method in the above-mentioned twelfth aspect.

[0084] Specifically, the non-AP MLD includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned twelfth aspect.

[0085] In the twenty-ninth aspect, an AP is provided for executing the method in the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect.

[0086] Specifically, the AP includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect.

[0087] In the thirtieth aspect, an AP is provided for executing the method in the above fourteenth aspect.

[0088] Specifically, the AP includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect.

[0089] In aspect 31, an AP is provided for executing the method in aspect 15 above.

[0090] Specifically, the AP includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned fifteenth aspect.

[0091] In aspect 32, an AP is provided for executing the method in aspect 16 above.

[0092] Specifically, the AP includes a functional module for executing the method in the above-mentioned sixteenth aspect.

[0093] In a thirty-third aspect, an AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD executes the method in the above-mentioned first aspect.

[0094] In a thirty-fourth aspect, a non-AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the non-AP MLD performs the method in the above-mentioned second aspect.

[0095] In the thirty-fifth aspect, an AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD executes the method in the above-mentioned third aspect.

[0096] In aspect 36, a non-AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the non-AP MLD performs the method in aspect 4 above.

[0097] In the thirty-seventh aspect, an AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD executes the method in the above-mentioned fifth aspect.

[0098] In the thirty-eighth aspect, an AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD executes the method in the above-mentioned sixth aspect.

[0099] In the thirty-ninth aspect, an AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD executes the method in the seventh aspect above.

[0100] In a 40th aspect, an AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD executes the method in the above-mentioned eighth aspect.

[0101] In the forty-first aspect, an AP is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP executes the method in the above-mentioned ninth aspect.

[0102] In the forty-second aspect, a non-AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the non-AP MLD performs the method in the above-mentioned tenth aspect.

[0103] In the forty-third aspect, an AP is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP executes the method in the above-mentioned eleventh aspect.

[0104] In the forty-fourth aspect, a non-AP MLD is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the non-AP MLD performs the method in the above-mentioned twelfth aspect.

[0105] In the forty-fifth aspect, an AP is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD executes the method in the above-mentioned thirteenth aspect.

[0106] In the forty-sixth aspect, an AP is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP executes the method in the above-mentioned fourteenth aspect.

[0107] In the forty-seventh aspect, an AP is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP executes the method in the above-mentioned fifteenth aspect.

[0108] In the forty-eighth aspect, an AP is provided, comprising a processor and a memory; the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP executes the method in the above-mentioned sixteenth aspect.

[0109] In the forty-ninth aspect, a device is provided for implementing the method in any one of the above-mentioned aspects from the first to the sixteenth aspects.

[0110] Specifically, the apparatus includes: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device equipped with the apparatus executes the method in any one of the first to sixteenth aspects described above.

[0111] In the fiftieth aspect, a computer-readable storage medium is provided for storing a computer program, which enables a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned aspects from the first to the sixteenth aspects.

[0112] In the fifty-first aspect, a computer program product is provided, comprising computer program instructions, wherein the computer program instructions enable a computer to execute the method in any one of the above-mentioned first to sixteenth aspects.

[0113] In aspect 52, a computer program is provided, which, when executed on a computer, enables the computer to execute the method of any one of aspects 1 to 16 above.

[0114] Through the technical solutions of the first and second aspects, multi-AP MLD joint channel detection under the first virtual AP MLD can be implemented.

[0115] Through the technical solutions of the third and fourth aspects, non-AP MLD uninterrupted roaming under the first virtual AP MLD can be achieved.

[0116] Through the technical solutions of the fifth and sixth aspects, data sharing between multiple AP MLDs under the first virtual AP MLD can be achieved.

[0117] Through the technical solutions of the seventh and eighth aspects, multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission under the first virtual AP MLD can be implemented.

[0118] Through the technical solutions of the ninth and tenth aspects, multi-AP joint channel detection under the second virtual AP MLD can be implemented.

[0119] Through the technical solutions of the eleventh and twelfth aspects, non-AP MLD uninterrupted roaming under the second virtual AP MLD can be achieved.

[0120] Through the technical solutions of the thirteenth and fourteenth aspects, data sharing between multiple APs under the second virtual AP MLD can be achieved.

[0121] Through the technical solutions of the fifteenth and sixteenth aspects, multi-AP cooperative transmission under the second virtual AP MLD can be achieved. BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS

[0122] FIG1 is a schematic diagram of a communication system architecture applied in an embodiment of the present application.

[0123] FIG2 is a schematic diagram of establishing multiple links between an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD provided by the present application.

[0124] FIG3 is a schematic diagram of multi-AP cooperative transmission provided by the present application.

[0125] FIG4 is a schematic diagram of a J-TX transmission provided by the present application.

[0126] FIG5 is a schematic diagram of an AP MLD composed of multiple non-collocated APs provided by the present application.

[0127] FIG6 is a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0128] FIG7 is a schematic diagram of multi-AP MLD multi-link collaboration according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0129] FIG8 is a schematic diagram of a multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0130] FIG9 is a schematic diagram of an NDPA frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0131] FIG10 is a schematic diagram of a STA information field in an NDPA frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0132] FIG11 is a schematic diagram of an NDP feedback frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0133] FIG12 is a schematic flowchart of a sequential channel detection (explicit) according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0134] FIG13 is a schematic flowchart of a joint channel detection (explicit) provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0135] FIG14 is a schematic diagram of a detection trigger frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0136] Figure 15 is a schematic diagram of a user information field in a detection trigger frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0137] FIG16 is a schematic flowchart of a sequential channel detection (implicit) provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0138] FIG17 is a schematic flowchart of a joint channel detection (implicit) provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0139] FIG18 is a schematic diagram of a first virtual AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0140] FIG19 is a schematic diagram of another first virtual AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0141] Figure 20 is a schematic flowchart of another wireless communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0142] FIG21 is a schematic diagram of a TID-to-link mapping element provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0143] FIG22 is a schematic diagram of a TID-to-link mapping control field provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0144] FIG23 is a schematic diagram of a multi-link element provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0145] Figure 24 is a schematic diagram of a multi-link control field provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0146] Figure 25 is a schematic diagram of a single STA overview sub-element in a reconfiguration multi-link element provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0147] Figure 26 is a schematic diagram of the STA control field in a reconfiguration multi-link element provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0148] Figure 27 is a schematic diagram of a beacon frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0149] Figure 28 is a schematic diagram of a probe response frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0150] Figure 29 is a schematic diagram of an action field in a TID-to-link mapping request frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0151] FIG30 is a schematic diagram of an action field in a TID-to-link mapping response frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0152] Figure 31 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction for uninterrupted roaming provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0153] Figure 32 is a schematic flowchart of another wireless communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0154] Figure 33 is a schematic diagram of a data sharing declaration frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0155] Figure 34 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction for data sharing provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0156] Figure 35 is a schematic flowchart of another wireless communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0157] FIG36 is a schematic diagram of signaling interaction for multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0158] FIG37 is a schematic diagram of a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0159] FIG38 is a schematic diagram of a general information field in a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0160] Figure 39 is a schematic flowchart of another wireless communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0161] Figure 40 is a schematic diagram of a multi-AP detection announcement frame provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0162] FIG41 is a schematic diagram of a second virtual AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0163] FIG42 is a schematic diagram of another second virtual AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0164] FIG43 is a schematic diagram of yet another second virtual AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0165] Figure 44 is a schematic flowchart of another wireless communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0166] Figure 45 is a schematic flowchart of another wireless communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0167] Figure 46 is a schematic flowchart of another wireless communication method provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0168] Figure 47 is a schematic block diagram of an AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0169] Figure 48 is a schematic block diagram of a non-AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0170] Figure 49 is a schematic block diagram of another AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0171] FIG50 is a schematic block diagram of another non-AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0172] FIG51 is a schematic block diagram of yet another AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0173] FIG52 is a schematic block diagram of yet another AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0174] FIG53 is a schematic block diagram of yet another AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0175] FIG54 is a schematic block diagram of yet another AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0176] Figure 55 is a schematic block diagram of an AP provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0177] FIG56 is a schematic block diagram of yet another non-AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0178] Figure 57 is a schematic block diagram of another AP provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0179] FIG58 is a schematic block diagram of another non-AP MLD provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0180] Figure 59 is a schematic block diagram of another AP provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0181] Figure 60 is a schematic block diagram of another AP provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0182] Figure 61 is a schematic block diagram of another AP provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0183] Figure 62 is a schematic block diagram of another AP provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0184] Figure 63 is a schematic block diagram of a communication device provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0185] Figure 64 is a schematic block diagram of a device provided according to an embodiment of the present application.

[0186] Figure 65 is a schematic block diagram of a communication system provided according to an embodiment of the present application. DETAILED DESCRIPTION

[0187] The following will describe the technical solutions in the embodiments of this application in conjunction with the drawings in the embodiments of this application. Obviously, the embodiments described are part of the embodiments of this application, not all of the embodiments. With respect to the embodiments in this application, all other embodiments obtained by ordinary technicians in this field without making creative efforts are within the scope of protection of this application.

[0188] The technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application can be applied to various communication systems, such as Wireless Local Area Networks (WLAN), Wireless Fidelity (WiFi), or other communication systems.

[0189] Please refer to Figure 1, which shows a schematic diagram of a wireless communication system provided by an embodiment of the present application. As shown in Figure 1, the wireless communication system may include: an access point (AP) and a station (STA).

[0190] In some scenarios, an AP can be referred to as an AP STA, meaning that in a sense, an AP is also a type of STA. In some scenarios, a STA can be referred to as a non-AP STA.

[0191] In some embodiments, STAs may include AP STAs and non-AP STAs. Communication in a communication system may be between an AP and a non-AP STA, between a non-AP STA and a non-AP STA, or between a STA and a peer STA. A peer STA may refer to a device that communicates with a STA. For example, a peer STA may be an AP or a non-AP STA.

[0192] An AP acts as a bridge between wired and wireless networks, connecting wireless network clients together and then connecting the wireless network to the Ethernet. An AP can be a terminal device (such as a mobile phone) or a network device (such as a router) equipped with a Wireless Fidelity (Wi-Fi) chip.

[0193] It should be understood that the role of STA in the communication system is not absolute. For example, in some scenarios, when a mobile phone is connected to a router, the mobile phone is a non-AP STA. When the mobile phone serves as a hotspot for other mobile phones, the mobile phone plays the role of AP.

[0194] APs and non-AP STAs can be devices used in the Internet of Vehicles, IoT nodes and sensors in the Internet of Things (IoT), smart cameras, smart remote controls, smart water and electricity meters in smart homes, and sensors in smart cities.

[0195] In some embodiments, a non-AP STA may support 802.11be. A non-AP STA may also support various current and future 802.11 family wireless LAN standards, such as 802.11ax, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, and 802.11a.

[0196] In some embodiments, the AP may be a device supporting the 802.11be standard. The AP may also be a device supporting various current and future 802.11 family WLAN standards, such as 802.11ax, 802.11ac, 802.11n, 802.11g, 802.11b, and 802.11a.

[0197] In the embodiment of the present application, the STA may be a mobile phone, tablet computer, computer, virtual reality (VR) device, augmented reality (AR) device, wireless device in industrial control, set-top box, wireless device in self-driving, in-vehicle communication equipment, wireless device in remote medical, wireless device in smart grid, wireless device in transportation safety, wireless device in smart city, wireless device in smart home, wireless communication chip, ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit), SOC (System on Chip), etc. that supports WLAN / WIFI technology.

[0198] The frequency bands supported by WLAN technology may include but are not limited to: low frequency bands (2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz) and high frequency bands (45 GHz, 60 GHz).

[0199] There are one or more links between the station and the access point. In some embodiments, the station and the access point support multi-band communication. For example, communication is performed simultaneously on the 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, 6 GHz, 45 GHz, and 60 GHz frequency bands, or communication is performed simultaneously on different channels of the same frequency band (or different frequency bands), thereby improving the communication throughput and / or reliability between devices. Such a device is generally referred to as a multi-band device, or a multi-link device (MLD), sometimes also referred to as a multi-link entity or a multi-band entity. A multi-link device can be an access point device or a station device. If the multi-link device is an access point device, the multi-link device includes one or more APs; if the multi-link device is a station device, the multi-link device includes one or more non-AP STAs.

[0200] A multi-link device including one or more APs may be referred to as an Access Point Multi-Link Device (AP MLD), and a multi-link device including one or more non-AP STAs may be referred to as a Non-Access Point Multi-Link Device (non-AP MLD).

[0201] In an embodiment of the present application, the AP may include multiple APs, the Non-AP may include multiple STAs, multiple links may be formed between the APs in the AP and the STAs in the Non-AP, and data communication may be performed between the APs in the AP and the corresponding STAs in the Non-AP through the corresponding links.

[0202] An AP is a device deployed in a wireless local area network to provide wireless communication capabilities for STAs. A station may include: User Equipment (UE), an access terminal, a subscriber unit, a subscriber station, a mobile station, a mobile station, a remote station, a remote terminal, a mobile device, a wireless communication device, a user agent, or a user device. Optionally, a station may also be a cellular phone, a cordless phone, a Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) phone, a Wireless Local Loop (WLL) station, a Personal Digital Assistant (PDA), a handheld device with wireless communication capabilities, a computing device or other processing device connected to a wireless modem, a vehicle-mounted device, or a wearable device, but the embodiments of the present application are not limited thereto.

[0203] Optionally, both the station and the access point support the IEEE 802.11 standard.

[0204] It should be understood that the terms "system" and "network" are often used interchangeably herein. The term "and / or" is simply a description of an association between related objects, indicating that three possible relationships exist. For example, "A and / or B" can represent: A exists alone, A and B exist simultaneously, or B exists alone. Furthermore, the character " / " generally indicates that the related objects are in an "or" relationship.

[0205] It should be understood that the "indication" mentioned in the embodiments of this application can be a direct indication, an indirect indication, or an indication of an association. For example, "A indicates B" can mean that A directly indicates B, for example, B can be obtained through A; it can also mean that A indirectly indicates B, for example, A indicates C, and B can be obtained through C; it can also mean that there is an association between A and B.

[0206] The terms used in the embodiments of this application are intended only to explain the specific embodiments of this application and are not intended to limit this application. The terms "first," "second," "third," and "fourth," etc. in the specification and claims of this application and the accompanying drawings are used to distinguish different objects, not to describe a specific order. In addition, the terms "including" and "having," and any variations thereof, are intended to cover non-exclusive inclusions.

[0207] In the description of the embodiments of the present application, the term "corresponding" may indicate a direct or indirect correspondence between the two, or an association relationship between the two, or a relationship between indication and being indicated, configuration and being configured, etc.

[0208] In the embodiments of the present application, "pre-defined" or "pre-configured" may be implemented by pre-storing corresponding codes, tables, or other methods that can be used to indicate relevant information in a device (e.g., including STAs and network devices). The present application does not limit the specific implementation method. For example, pre-defined may refer to what is defined in the protocol.

[0209] In the embodiments of the present application, the “protocol” may refer to a standard protocol in the communication field, for example, it may include a WiFi protocol and related protocols used in future WiFi communication systems, and the present application does not limit this.

[0210] To facilitate a better understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the multi-link operations related to the present application are described.

[0211] An AP MLD can establish multiple links with non-AP MLDs on different frequency bands / channels. As shown in Figure 2, three links (link 1, link 2, and link 3) are established between the AP MLD and non-AP MLDs at 2.4 GHz, 5 GHz, and 6 GHz, respectively. These links can operate simultaneously. AP 1 operating on link 1 (2.4 GHz), AP 2 operating on link 2 (5 GHz), and AP 3 operating on link 3 (6 GHz) are called affiliated APs of the AP MLD. Similarly, non-AP STA 1 operating on link 1 (2.4 GHz), non-AP STA 2 operating on link 2 (5 GHz), and non-AP STA 3 operating on link 3 (6 GHz) are called affiliated STAs of the non-AP MLD.

[0212] To facilitate a better understanding of the embodiments of the present application, multi-AP collaboration related to the present application is described.

[0213] As shown in Figure 3, multiple APs can form a multi-AP cooperative set (Multi-AP Candidate Set), in which one AP acts as the master AP (Master AP, MAP or M-AP) through a wired or wireless link (also known as a backhaul link (backhaul link)) to manage and control the other slave APs (Slave AP, SAP or S-AP) in the Multi-AP Candidate Set. Then the APs in the Multi-AP Candidate Set can provide services for STAs (such as STA a, STA b) through collaboration.

[0214] Among them, multi-AP collaboration can be achieved in many ways, such as coordinated orthogonal frequency division multiple access (C-OFDMA), coordinated time division multiple access (C-TDMA), coordinated beamforming (C-BF), joint transmission (J-TX), coordinated spatial reuse (C-SR) and coordinated uplink multi-user multiple-input multiple-output (C-UL MU-MIMO).

[0215] To facilitate a better understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the J-TX in the multi-AP collaboration related to the present application is described.

[0216] As shown in Figure 4, in a multi-AP architecture, the coordinator of multiple APs can be an independent device, and each AP is connected to the coordinator via a wired or wireless connection. In addition, the coordinator of multiple APs can be any AP (this AP can be called the Master AP), and then other APs (called Slave APs) are connected to the Master AP (i.e., the AP with the Coordinator) via a wired or wireless connection. Figure 4 shows a schematic diagram of multiple APs using J-TX to provide STA services. AP 1 and AP 2 simultaneously use the steering matrix calculated after channel sounding in the same frequency band to send data to STA 1.

[0217] To facilitate a better understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the logic of multiple APs forming multiple links related to the present application is described.

[0218] As shown in Figure 5, multiple non-collocated APs are treated as a single logical AP MLD entity. When a STA connects to this AP MLD, the multiple non-collocated APs can be considered as different subordinate APs of the AP MLD. This allows the multi-link operation architecture to use different subordinate APs and different links to provide services to the STA, further enhancing STA uninterrupted roaming. As shown in Figure 5, STA x uses multiple links to connect to AP 1 and AP 2. When STA x sends a move signal, the link to AP 1 is disconnected, but the link to AP 2 is not affected. This improves STA mobility support.

[0219] In order to facilitate a better understanding of the embodiments of the present application, the problems solved by the present application are explained.

[0220] With the popularization of mobile communication devices and the rapid development of mobile Internet, people's demand for access to the Internet anytime and anywhere is becoming more and more urgent. Nowadays, in office areas, shopping malls and stadiums, AP deployment is becoming more and more dense, and the signal interference between devices has become very serious. This has brought huge challenges to people's high-reliability, high-speed and low-latency communication requirements. Therefore, multi-AP collaboration technology is particularly important. Usually, STAs that need to perform multi-AP collaboration are in the overlapping area of ​​multiple APs, and are far away from each AP. The signal quality and link stability are weak. In order to improve the communication rate of such STAs, improve the reliability of communication and provide a low-latency communication experience, this application proposes a multi-AP MLD collaborative communication solution, which uses multi-AP MLD to provide high-reliability, high-speed and low-latency services for non-AP MLD.

[0221] To facilitate understanding of the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application, the technical solutions of the present application are described in detail below through specific embodiments. The following related technologies can be combined with the technical solutions of the embodiments of the present application as optional solutions, and they all fall within the scope of protection of the embodiments of the present application. The embodiments of the present application include at least part of the following contents.

[0222] FIG6 is a schematic flow chart of a wireless communication method 200 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG6 , the wireless communication method 200 may include at least part of the following contents:

[0223] S210, the first AP MLD sends or receives a multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame;

[0224] The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, the frequency band information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the links and / or frequency bands for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection;

[0225] The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, and multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability.

[0226] In the embodiment of the present application, multi-AP MLD joint channel detection can be implemented.

[0227] In the embodiment of the present application, in the above S210, when the first AP MLD sends a multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, the first AP MLD may be a master AP MLD (Master AP MLD); when the first AP MLD receives a multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, the first AP MLD may be a slave AP MLD (Slave AP MLD).

[0228] In some embodiments, an AP MLD may belong to one or more virtual AP MLDs.

[0229] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD should have only one master AP MLD (Master AP MLD), and the remaining AP MLDs are slave AP MLDs (Slave AP MLDs).

[0230] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD may support one or more multi-AP MLD cooperation modes.

[0231] In the embodiments of the present application, a “field” may also be referred to as a “field” or a “subfield.” A field may occupy one or more bytes (byte / octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).

[0232] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD. Of course, in some embodiments, the first AP MLD may also be a slave AP MLD, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

[0233] In an embodiment of the present application, if two or more AP MLDs use links in the same frequency band (the same channel) to simultaneously transmit data for one or more non-AP MLDs, then the links in the same frequency band (the same channel) need to perform joint channel sounding, while other links do not need to perform channel sounding. Alternatively, if two or more non-AP MLDs use links in the same frequency band (the same channel) to simultaneously transmit data for one or more AP MLDs, then the links in the same frequency band (the same channel) need to perform joint channel sounding, while other links do not need to perform channel sounding.

[0234] In some embodiments, a schematic diagram of multiple AP MLDs using multiple links for collaborative transmission can be shown in Figure 7. For collaborative modes such as C-BF and J-TX, the AP MLDs and non-AP MLDs participating in the collaborative transmission need to perform channel sounding in advance to obtain accurate channel state information (CSI), and then use beamforming technology to achieve a higher collaborative transmission gain. Channel sounding can be divided into sequential channel sounding and joint channel sounding according to the order of sounding. According to whether the channel sounding results (NDP feedback / CSI report) need to be fed back / sent after sounding, channel sounding can be divided into explicit feedback (which requires CSI feedback) and implicit feedback (which does not require CSI feedback).

[0235] In the embodiment of the present application, as shown in Figure 7 , AP MLD 1 uses its Link 1 and Link 2 to transmit data to non-AP MLD 1, AP MLD 2 uses its Link 3 to transmit data to non-AP MLD 1, and AP MLD 2 uses its Link 4 and Link 5 to transmit data to non-AP MLD 2. Because Link 1 of AP MLD 1 and Link 3 of AP MLD 2 may operate on the same channel in the same frequency band (e.g., 2.4 GHz), in the mode in which AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 jointly transmit for non-AP MLD 1, AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 need to perform joint channel sounding on their respective Link 1 and Link 3, but do not need to perform channel sounding on Link 2, Link 4, and Link 5.

[0236] In some embodiments, the multi-AP MLD detection announcement field in the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame includes at least one of the following: a virtual basic service set identifier (VBSSID) field, a cooperation set identifier field, a detection method field, and a detection configuration field;

[0237] Among them, the VBSSID field is used to indicate the VBSSID of the first virtual AP MLD, the collaboration set identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the multi-AP MLD collaboration set corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD, the detection method field is used to indicate the method for the multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, and the detection configuration field is used to indicate the configuration information for the multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection.

[0238] Optionally, the coordination set identification field may also be replaced by a virtual basic service set (VBSS) color field. The VBSS color field may be used to indicate the multi-AP MLD coordination set corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0239] In some embodiments, the detection method field includes at least one of the following: a Sequential or Joint field, an Explicit or Implicit field;

[0240] The first value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding in sequence, and the second value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding simultaneously.

[0241] The explicit or implicit field takes a first value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform explicit channel sounding, and the explicit or implicit field takes a second value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform implicit channel sounding.

[0242] For example, if the sequence or association field = 1, multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence; if the sequence or association field = 0, multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection simultaneously; or if the sequence or association field = 0, multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence; if the sequence or association field = 1, multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection simultaneously.

[0243] For example, the explicit or implicit field = 1 indicates that multiple AP MLDs perform explicit channel detection, and the explicit or implicit field = 0 indicates that multiple AP MLDs perform implicit channel detection; or, the explicit or implicit field = 0 indicates that multiple AP MLDs perform explicit channel detection, and the explicit or implicit field = 1 indicates that multiple AP MLDs perform implicit channel detection.

[0244] In some embodiments, when the order or joint field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding in sequence, the time and / or order of the multiple AP MLDs performing channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field; or, when the order or joint field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding simultaneously, the time of the multiple AP MLDs performing channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

[0245] In some embodiments, Explicit or Implicit subfield = 0: instructs multiple AP MLDs to perform explicit channel sounding, that is, the AP MLD sends an NDPA+NDP frame, and the non-AP MLD needs to feedback the channel sounding result; Explicit or Implicit subfield = 1: instructs multiple AP MLDs to perform implicit channel sounding, that is, the non-AP MLD sends an NDP frame, and the AP MLD directly obtains the channel sounding result.

[0246] In some embodiments, the detection configuration field includes, but is not limited to, at least one of the following: an AP MLD number field, a plurality of AP MLD detection configuration fields;

[0247] The AP MLD quantity field is used to indicate the number of AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the mth AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields is used to indicate configuration information of the mth AP MLD participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0248] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel probing in sequence, the order of the AP MLD probing configuration fields in the multiple AP MLD probing configuration fields indicates the order in which the corresponding AP MLDs perform multi-AP MLD channel probing.

[0249] In some embodiments, the AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a Basic Service Set Identifier (BSSID) field, an AP MLD identification field, a start time field, and a basic multi-link element; wherein the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performing multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the basic multi-link element is used to indicate link information used by the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0250] In some embodiments, the AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP MLD identification field, a start time field, and a link identification information field; wherein the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performing multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the link identification information field is used to indicate link information used by the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0251] In some embodiments, the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[0252] In which, when the link identification information field includes only the link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes only the link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes the link identification field and the link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0253] In some embodiments, the frame format of the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame can be as shown in Figure 8, wherein the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame includes a frame control field (occupies 2 bytes), a duration field (occupies 2 bytes), a receiving address (RA) (occupies 6 bytes), a transmitting address (TA) (occupies 6 bytes), a multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame field (the number of bytes occupied is variable), and a frame check sequence (FCS) field (occupies 4 bytes). Specifically, the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame field includes: a VBSSID field (occupies 0 or 6 bytes), a coordination set identifier or VBSS color field (occupies 0 or 1 byte), a detection method field (occupies 1 byte), and a detection configuration field (the number of bytes occupied is variable). The detection method field includes: a sequence or joint field (occupies 1 bit) and an explicit or implicit field (occupies 1 bit). The detection configuration field includes: an AP MLD number field (occupies 1 byte), 1 st AP MLD detection configuration field, 2 nd AP MLD detection configuration field, ..., m th AP MLD Detection Configuration Field. The AP MLD Detection Configuration Field includes: BSSID field (occupies 6 bytes), AP MLD Identifier field (occupies 1 byte), Start Time field (occupies 1 byte), Basic Multilink Element (occupies a variable number of bytes); or, the AP MLD Detection Configuration Field includes: BSSID field (occupies 6 bytes), AP MLD Identifier field (occupies 1 byte), Start Time field (occupies 1 byte), Link Identifier Information field (occupies 1 byte); wherein the Link Identifier Information field includes the Link Identifier field (occupies 4 bits) and the Link Identifier Extension field (occupies 4 bits).

[0254] It should be noted that in Figure 8, the Basic Multi-Link element is used to indicate the link information used by the current AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel sounding. The Basic Multi-Link element contains a lot of unnecessary information and may be replaced by the Link ID Info subfield. In Figure 8, the Link ID Info field is used to indicate the link information used by the current AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel sounding and may be replaced by the Basic Multi-Link element.

[0255] In some embodiments, the first non-AP MLD receives a first frame sent by the first AP MLD;

[0256] The first frame is sent by the first AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the first frame is an NDPA frame or a detection trigger frame;

[0257] The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, the frequency band information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the links and / or frequency bands for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection;

[0258] Wherein, in the case where the first frame is an NDPA frame, the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of a Null Data Physical Protocol Data Unit NDP frame sent subsequently;

[0259] Wherein, in the case that the first frame is a detection trigger frame, the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result.

[0260] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs include the first AP MLD (i.e., the first AP MLD participates in joint channel sounding) and the multiple AP MLDs perform explicit channel sounding, the first AP MLD sends a Null Data Physical Protocol Data Unit Announcement (NDPA) frame to a first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD sounding announcement frame, wherein the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of a subsequently sent NDP frame, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel sounding; and the first AP MLD sends a Null Data Physical Protocol Data Unit (NDP) frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent, wherein a time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is not less than a short interframe space (SIFS).

[0261] In some embodiments, when the first frame is an NDPA frame and the multiple AP MLDs perform explicit channel sounding, the first non-AP MLD receives an NDP frame sent by the first AP MLD on the channel through which the NDPA frame is sent, wherein a time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is no less than one SIFS.

[0262] In some embodiments, the NDPA frame includes a non-AP MLD information list field, and the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field;

[0263] In which case, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0264] In some embodiments, when the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD covers all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the first AP MLD sends a beamforming report poll (BFRP) trigger frame to all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent, where the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection to feed back channel detection results to the AP MLD associated therewith; and the first AP MLD receives an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes the channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

[0265] In some embodiments, when the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD covers all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the first non-AP MLD receives a beamforming report polling (BFRP) trigger frame sent by the first AP MLD on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent, where the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection to feed back channel detection results to the AP MLD associated therewith; and the first non-AP MLD sends an NDP feedback frame to the first AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes the channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

[0266] In some embodiments, when the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the first AP MLD sends a BFRP trigger frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel through which the NDPA frame is sent, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result; and the first AP MLD receives an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes the channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

[0267] In some embodiments, when the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the first non-AP MLD receives a BFRP trigger frame sent by the first AP MLD on the channel through which the NDPA frame is sent, where the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result; and the first non-AP MLD sends an NDP feedback frame to the first AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes the channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

[0268] In some embodiments, the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[0269] In which, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0270] In some embodiments, the NDP feedback frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are jointly used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

[0271] In some embodiments, the NDP feedback frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

[0272] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames in the order indicated by the multiple AP MLD sounding announcement frame.

[0273] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel sounding, the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multiple AP MLD sounding announcement frame.

[0274] In some embodiments, the frame format of the NDPA frame may be as shown in FIG9 , where the (Master) AP MLD uses the NDPA frame to indicate the parameters and configuration of the NDP frame to be sent by the AP MLD next, wherein the STA Information List field includes one or more STA Information fields (STA Info field). The STA Information field may be as shown in FIG10 , where the STA Information field of the Extremely High Throughput (EHT) NDP announcement frame may remain unchanged, or a Link ID field and a Link ID Extension field may be added to the STA Info field to indicate on which links the current AP MLD is to send the NDP frame. Specifically, the STA information field includes an Association Identifier (AID) 11 field (occupies 11 bits), a Partial BW Info field (occupies 9 bits), an Nc index field (occupies 4 bits), a feedback type and Ng field (occupies 2 bits), a Disambiguation field (occupies 1 bit), a Codebook Size (occupies 1 bit), a Link Identifier (optional) (occupies 0 or 4 bits), and a Link Identifier Extension (optional) (occupies 0 or 4 bits).

[0275] In some embodiments, the BFRP trigger frame can use bits B25, B32-B38 as the Link ID and Link ID Extension to indicate the link on which the non-AP MLD should send the NDP feedback frame to report the channel sounding results. Alternatively, the Trigger Dependent User Info subfield at the end of the User Info field carries the (Basic) Multi-Link element to indicate the link(s) on which the non-AP MLD should send the NDP feedback frame to report the channel sounding results. However, the BFRP Trigger frame differs from the Sounding Trigger frame in that the Trigger Type subfield in the Common Info field is set to 1.

[0276] In some embodiments, the NDP feedback frame may be similar to the EHT Compressed Beamforming (Compressed Beamforming) / Channel Quantity Indicator (CQI) frame format as shown in FIG11 , and is used to carry the channel sounding result. This embodiment proposes adding a Link ID Info field (including Link ID and Link ID Extension) or a (Basic) Multi-Link element (including Link ID Info field) to carry the link to which the channel sounding result belongs.

[0277] In some embodiments, as shown in FIG7 , two AP MLDs and two non-AP MLDs are used as an example, where non-AP MLD 1 is associated with AP MLD 1, and non-AP MLD 2 is associated with AP MLD 2 (or AP MLD 2 is the anchor AP of non-AP MLD 2). AP MLD 1 is the Master AP MLD, and AP MLD 2 is the Slave AP MLD, both of which are managed and controlled by AP MLD 1. AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 use 2.4 GHz Link 1 and Link 3, respectively, for joint transmission for non-AP MLD 1. Specifically, the process of sequential channel sounding with explicit feedback can be shown in FIG12 . Its characteristic is that each AP MLD participating in channel sounding sends NDPA frames and / or NDP frames to the non-AP MLD in sequence (at different times), as described below:

[0278] Step 1: The Master AP MLD sends a Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame to the Slave AP MLD, informing it to start channel sounding. The Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame indicates the order and timing of channel sounding for each Slave AP MLD, as well as the link / frequency band and corresponding channel for the Slave AP MLD and the Master AP MLD (if the Master AP MLD participates in channel sounding).

[0279] Step 2: If the Master AP MLD participates in channel sounding, then SIFS after sending the multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame, the Master AP MLD uses the instructions in the multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame to send an NDPA frame to the non-AP MLD on the relevant link / frequency band and corresponding channel. Then, SIFS after the Master AP MLD sends an NDP frame to the non-AP MLD on the channel where the NDPA frame was sent. If the Master AP MLD does not participate in channel sounding, SIFS after sending the multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame, the first Slave AP MLD that performs channel sounding sends an NDPA frame (i.e., Step 3).

[0280] Step 3: Each slave AP MLD sends an NDPA frame to the non-AP MLD on the relevant link / frequency band and corresponding channel according to the instructions in the MAP Sounding Announce frame. Then, after the SIFS time, the slave AP MLD sends an NDP frame to the non-AP MLD on the channel where the NDPA frame was sent.

[0281] Step 4: If the Master AP MLD can cover all non-AP MLDs (participating in channel sounding), the Master AP MLD sends a BFRP Trigger frame to all non-AP MLDs on the channel where it previously sent the NDPA / NDP frame, triggering / requesting all non-AP MLDs to reply with an NDP feedback frame carrying the channel sounding results of the Master AP MLD and Slave AP MLDs.

[0282] Step 5: If the Master AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs (participating in channel sounding), each Slave AP MLD will send a BFRP Trigger frame to the non-AP MLD on the channel where the NDPA / NDP frame was previously sent in the order specified by the multiple AP MLD Sounding Announce frames, triggering / requesting the non-AP MLD to reply with an NDP feedback frame carrying the channel sounding result of the Slave AP MLD.

[0283] In some embodiments, taking the example of two AP MLDs and two non-AP MLDs as shown in FIG7 , non-AP MLD 1 is associated with AP MLD 1, and non-AP MLD 2 is associated with AP MLD 2 (or AP MLD 2 is the anchor AP of non-AP MLD 2). AP MLD 1 is the Master AP MLD, and AP MLD 2 is the Slave AP MLD, both of which are managed and controlled by AP MLD 1. AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 use 2.4 GHz Link 1 and Link 3, respectively, for joint transmission on behalf of non-AP MLD 1. Specifically, the process of joint channel sounding with explicit feedback can be shown in FIG13 , which is characterized in that each AP MLD participating in channel sounding simultaneously sends an NDPA frame and / or an NDP frame to the non-AP MLDs. The details are as follows:

[0284] Step 1: The Master AP MLD sends a Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame to the Slave AP MLD, informing it to start channel sounding. This frame instructs the Slave AP MLD and the Master AP MLD (if the Master AP MLD participates in channel sounding) on ​​the link / frequency band and corresponding channel for channel sounding.

[0285] Step 2: SIFS after the Master AP MLD sends the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame, the AP MLDs participating in Joint Channel Sounding (for example, AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2) use the instructions in the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame to send NDPA frames to non-AP MLDs on the relevant link / frequency band and corresponding channel.

[0286] Step 3: After the SIFS period, the AP MLDs participating in Joint channel sounding (e.g., AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2) use the instructions in the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce / NDPA frame to send an NDP frame to the non-AP MLDs on the relevant link / band and corresponding channel.

[0287] Step 4: If the Master AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs (participating in channel sounding), the Master AP MLD (for example, AP MLD 1) sends a BFRP Trigger frame to the associated non-AP MLD, triggering / requesting the non-AP MLD to reply with an NDP feedback frame carrying the channel sounding result of the AP MLD (for example, AP MLD 1). If the Master AP MLD can cover all non-AP MLDs (participating in channel sounding), the Master AP MLD sends a BFRP Trigger frame to the non-AP MLDs after a SIFS period of sending the NDP frame, triggering / requesting the non-AP MLDs to reply with an NDP feedback frame carrying the channel sounding results of the Master AP MLD (for example, AP MLD 1) and the Slave AP MLDs (for example, AP MLD 2). In this case, Steps 6 and 7 do not occur.

[0288] Step 5: Each non-AP MLD participating in Joint channel sounding responds to the BFRP Trigger frame of the Master AP MLD (e.g., AP MLD 1) and sends the channel sounding result to the Master AP MLD (e.g., AP MLD 1) and Slave AP MLD (e.g., AP MLD 2) using an NDP feedback frame.

[0289] Step 6 (optional): If the Master AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs (participating in channel sounding), each Slave AP MLD will send a BFRP Trigger frame to its associated non-AP MLD in the order specified by the MAP Sounding Announce frame, triggering / requesting the non-AP MLD to reply with an NDP feedback frame carrying the channel sounding result of the Slave AP MLD (for example, AP MLD 2).

[0290] Step 7 (optional): Each non-AP MLD participating in Joint channel sounding responds to the BFRP Trigger frame of the Slave AP MLD (for example, AP MLD2) and sends the channel sounding result to its associated Slave AP MLD (for example, AP MLD 2) through an NDP feedback frame.

[0291] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs include the first AP MLD and the multiple AP MLDs perform implicit channel sounding, the first AP MLD sends a sounding trigger frame to a first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD sounding announcement frame, wherein the sounding trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel sounding result, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel sounding; and the first AP MLD receives an NDP frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the NDP frame includes the channel sounding result of the first AP MLD.

[0292] In some embodiments, when the first frame is a sounding trigger frame and the multiple AP MLDs perform implicit channel sounding, the first non-AP MLD sends an NDP frame to the first AP MLD, wherein the NDP frame includes a channel sounding result of the first AP MLD.

[0293] In some embodiments, the user information field in the detection trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, wherein the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0294] In some embodiments, the NDP frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

[0295] In some embodiments, the NDP frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

[0296] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel probing in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel probing to send NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP MLD probing announcement frame.

[0297] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel probing, the multiple AP MLDs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel probing to simultaneously and synchronously send NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP MLD probing announcement frame.

[0298] In some embodiments, the frame format of the Sounding Trigger frame may be as shown in Figure 14. The Sounding Trigger frame is a variant of the Trigger frame. For example, setting the Trigger Type in the Common Info field to any value between 8 and 15 indicates that the Trigger frame is a Sounding Trigger frame. The AP MLD sends this frame to trigger the non-AP MLDs indicated in the User Info List field to send NDP frames for channel sounding according to the parameters and configuration specified in the Sounding Trigger frame.

[0299] Specifically, the User Info List field in the detection trigger frame may include one or more User Info fields, where the User Info field may use the 8 bits B25, B32 to B38 as the Link ID field and Link ID Extension, as shown in FIG15 , to indicate on which link the non-AP MLD corresponding to AID12 is to send the NDP frame for channel sounding. It is worth noting that at this time, the User Info field can only indicate the ID of one link, which means that the Master AP MLD can only trigger the AP MLD to use one link for channel sounding through the Sounding Trigger frame.

[0300] In addition to the above method, the Trigger Dependent User Info field at the end of the User Info field can also be used to carry the (Basic) Multi-Link element to indicate which links the non-AP MLD corresponding to AID12 should send the NDP frame on for channel sounding. It is worth noting that the (Basic) Multi-Link element carried by the Trigger Dependent User Info field of the User Info field can indicate the IDs of multiple links, which means that the Master AP MLD can trigger the AP MLD to use one or more links for channel sounding through the Sounding Trigger frame. The Trigger frame does not need to indicate Link ID related information, because the link on which the Trigger frame is sent indicates the link on which the Trigger frame is transmitted to perform channel sounding.

[0301] Specifically, as shown in FIG15 , the User Info field includes the following fields:

[0302] The AID12 field (occupies 12 bits), the Resource Unit (RU) Allocation field (occupies 8 bits), the Downlink Forward Error Correction (FEC) Coding Type field (occupies 1 bit), the Downlink EHT Modulation and Coding Scheme (EHT-MCS) field (occupies 4 bits), the Spatial Streams (SS) Allocation field (occupies 6 bits), the Link Identification Information field (occupies 8 bits), the Primary-Secondary (PS) 160 field (occupies 1 bit), and the Trigger Dependent User Info field (occupies a variable number of bits). The Link Identification Information field includes the Link Identification field (occupies 4 bits) and the Link Identification Extension field (occupies 4 bits); the Trigger Dependent User Info field includes the (Basic) Multilink Element (occupies a variable number of bits).

[0303] In some embodiments, as shown in FIG7 , two AP MLDs and two non-AP MLDs are used as an example, where non-AP MLD 1 is associated with AP MLD 1, and non-AP MLD 2 is associated with AP MLD 2 (or AP MLD 2 is the anchor AP of non-AP MLD 2). AP MLD 1 is the Master AP MLD, and AP MLD 2 is the Slave AP MLD, both managed and controlled by AP MLD 1. AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 use 2.4 GHz Link 1 and Link 3, respectively, for joint transmission for non-AP MLD 1. Specifically, the process of sequential channel sounding with implicit feedback can be shown in FIG16 . Its characteristic is that each AP MLD participating in channel sounding triggers the non-AP MLDs to send NDP frames in sequence (at different times), and each AP MLD directly obtains the channel sounding results. The details are as follows:

[0304] Step 1: The Master AP MLD sends a Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame to the Slave AP MLD, informing it to start channel sounding. The Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame indicates the order and timing for each Slave AP MLD to trigger non-AP MLDs for channel sounding. In addition, the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame also instructs the Slave AP MLD and the Master AP MLD (if the Master AP MLD participates in channel sounding) on ​​the link, frequency band, and corresponding channel to trigger non-AP MLDs for channel sounding.

[0305] Step 2: If the Master AP MLD participates in channel sounding, then SIFS after sending the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame, the Master AP MLD uses the instructions in the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame to send a Sounding Trigger frame to its associated target non-AP MLD (i.e., non-AP MLD 1) on the relevant link / frequency band and corresponding channel. Then, SIFS after the non-AP MLD sends an NDP frame to AP MLDs in the Sounding Trigger frame on the link / frequency band and corresponding channel indicated in the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame. If the Master AP MLD does not participate in channel sounding, SIFS after sending the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame, the first Slave AP MLD performing channel sounding sends a Sounding Trigger frame (i.e., Step 3).

[0306] Step 3: Each Slave AP MLD sends a Sounding Trigger frame to its associated target non-AP MLD on the relevant link / frequency band and corresponding channel according to the instructions in the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame. Then, after the SIFS time, the non-AP MLD sends an NDP frame to the AP MLDs on the link / frequency band and corresponding channel indicated in the Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame, thus completing channel sounding.

[0307] In some embodiments, taking the example of two AP MLDs and two non-AP MLDs as shown in FIG7 , non-AP MLD 1 is associated with AP MLD 1, and non-AP MLD 2 is associated with AP MLD 2 (or AP MLD 2 is the anchor AP of non-AP MLD 2). AP MLD 1 is the Master AP MLD, and AP MLD 2 is the Slave AP MLD, both of which are managed and controlled by AP MLD 1. AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 use 2.4 GHz Link 1 and Link 3, respectively, to jointly transmit for non-AP MLD 1. Specifically, the process of joint channel sounding with implicit feedback can be shown in FIG17 , which is characterized in that each AP MLD participating in channel sounding triggers the non-AP MLDs to send NDP frames simultaneously, and each AP MLD directly obtains the channel sounding results. The details are as follows:

[0308] Step 1: The Master AP MLD sends a Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame to the Slave AP MLD, instructing it to start channel sounding. The Multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame instructs the Slave AP MLD and the Master AP MLD (if the Master AP MLD participates in channel sounding) to trigger non-AP MLDs to perform channel sounding, including the link / frequency band and corresponding channel.

[0309] Step 2: After the SIFS timer, the Master AP MLD (if participating in joint sounding) and the Slave AP MLDs participating in channel sounding send a Sounding Trigger frame to their associated target non-AP MLD on the relevant link / band and corresponding channel using the order indicated in the multi-AP MLD Sounding Announce frame.

[0310] Step 3: After the SIFS period, each non-AP MLD sends an NDP frame to its associated target AP MLD on the relevant link / frequency band and corresponding channel according to the instructions in the Sounding Trigger frame, thus completing channel sounding.

[0311] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD may be composed of some or all AP MLDs in a multi-AP MLD coordination set. Alternatively, the first virtual AP MLD may be a logical AP MLD. That is, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0312] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD Media Access Control (MAC); wherein the virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD Upper MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0313] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD (Master AP MLD) among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent controller device.

[0314] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper MAC (MLD Upper MAC), a non-MLD upper MAC (non-MLD Upper MAC), an MLD lower MAC (MLD Lower MAC), and a physical layer (PHY).

[0315] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD may be as shown in FIG18 . The first virtual AP MLD includes AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2. AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 are two AP MLDs with complete MLD Upper MAC, non-MLD Upper MAC, MLD Lower MAC, and PHY. The virtual MLD MAC in the first virtual AP MLD is located on an independent controller device. The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD Upper MAC of AP MLD 1, which is connected to the MLD Lower MAC of AP MLD 1. The virtual MLD MAC is also connected to the MLD Upper MAC of AP MLD 2, which is connected to the MLD Lower MAC of AP MLD 2. The virtual MLD MAC manages and controls AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2.

[0316] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD may be as shown in FIG19 . The first virtual AP MLD includes AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2. AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 are two AP MLDs that have complete MLD Upper MAC, non-MLD Upper MAC, MLD Lower MAC, and PHY. The virtual MLD MAC in the first virtual AP MLD is located in AP MLD 1 (Master AP MLD). The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD Upper MAC of AP MLD 1, which in turn is connected to the MLD Lower MAC of AP MLD 1. Furthermore, the virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD Upper MAC of AP MLD 2, which in turn is connected to the MLD Lower MAC of AP MLD 2. The virtual MLD MAC manages and controls AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2. That is, AP MLD 1 has a virtual MLD MAC that manages and controls all AP MLDs in the virtual AP MLD. The MLD Upper MAC address of the AP MLD in the Virtual AP MLD is connected to the Virtual MLD MAC address of AP MLD 1.

[0317] Specifically, as shown in Figures 18 and 19, AP MLD 1 can establish multiple links (Link 1 and Link 2) with non-AP MLD 1 and non-AP MLD 2, and AP MLD 2 can establish multiple links (Link 3, Link 4, Link 5, and Link 6) with non-AP MLD 2, non-AP MLD 3, and non-AP MLD 4.

[0318] Optionally, as shown in Figures 18 and 19, AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 simultaneously provide data transmission services for non-AP MLD 2 over 5 GHz Link 2 and Link 4, respectively. This can improve the communication rate and reduce latency for non-AP MLD 2. Because the 5 GHz signal path loss is more severe than the slightly lower 2.4 GHz band, communication stability for non-AP MLD 2 may be poor. Therefore, AP MLD 2 can also use 2.4 GHz Link 3 to provide services for non-AP MLD 2.

[0319] Optionally, as shown in Figures 18 and 19, since non-AP MLD 2 establishes multi-link links with AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2, when non-AP MLD 2 moves away from AP MLD 1 and causes Link 2 to be interrupted, non-AP MLD 2 still maintains a link with AP MLD 2 through Link 3 and Link 4. Therefore, seamless roaming / uninterrupted switching of non-AP MLD can be achieved.

[0320] Specifically, as shown in FIG. 18 and FIG. 19 , the first virtual AP MLD can also be regarded as a three-layer network architecture.

[0321] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation for the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD. Specifically, for example, a non-AP MLD sends an association request frame to an Anchor AP in the Virtual AP MLD to associate with all subordinate AP MLDs in the Virtual AP MLD and establish multiple links. The Controller in the Virtual AP MLD manages Link ID allocation for the entire VBSS. Therefore, a Link ID that does not duplicate previously assigned Link IDs can be assigned to the non-AP MLD for multi-link communication with each AP MLD in the Virtual AP MLD. That is, when multiple AP MLDs collaborate, the Controller in the Virtual AP MLD coordinates the allocation of unique Link IDs between the non-AP MLD and the Virtual AP MLD. This prevents a non-AP MLD from establishing the same Link ID with different AP MLDs, which could result in mapping errors during TID-to-Link mapping.

[0322] In some embodiments, after the first non-AP MLD successfully associates with the target multi-AP MLD cooperation set, some of the links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD transmit only control plane information and other parts of the links transmit only data plane information. Alternatively, some or all of the links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0323] For example, as shown in Figures 18 and 19 , Link 3 between AP MLD 2 and non-AP MLD 2 can function only as the control plane, that is, only transmit control frames and / or management frames. Link 2 between AP MLD 1 and non-AP MLD 2, and Link 4 between AP MLD 2 and non-AP MLD 2 can function only as the data plane, that is, transmit data frames. Alternatively, Link 3 between AP MLD 2 and non-AP MLD 2 can transmit both control frames, management frames, and data frames. This is not a limitation of the present invention.

[0324] In some embodiments, after the first non-AP MLD successfully associates with the target multi-AP MLD cooperation set, the same subordinate STA of the first non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate APs of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD. Specifically, the same subordinate STA of the non-AP MLD can establish links with subordinate APs of multiple AP MLDs. Specifically, after a subordinate non-AP STA (or subordinate AP) of a non-AP MLD (or AP MLD) establishes a link with a subordinate AP (subordinate non-AP STA) under one AP MLD (or non-AP MLD), the same subordinate non-AP STA (or subordinate AP) of the non-AP MLD (or AP MLD) is allowed to establish a link with a subordinate AP (subordinate non-AP STA) under another AP MLD (or non-AP MLD).

[0325] In some embodiments, after the first non-AP MLD successfully associates with the target multi-AP MLD cooperation set, multiple links corresponding to the same subordinate STA of the first non-AP MLD transmit the same physical layer protocol data unit (PPDU), or multiple links corresponding to the same subordinate STA of the first non-AP MLD transmit different PPDUs.

[0326] For example, as shown in Figures 18 and 19, link 2 between AP MLD 1 and non-AP MLD 2 and link 4 between AP MLD 2 and non-AP MLD 2 can transmit the same PPDU (i.e., exactly the same data) to improve communication reliability / stability. Alternatively, link 2 between AP MLD 1 and non-AP MLD 2 and link 4 between AP MLD 2 and non-AP MLD 2 can also transmit different PPDUs (i.e., different data) to improve communication rate / throughput. The present invention is not limited to this.

[0327] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput (EHT) non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD supports association with only one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD to establish a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is assigned by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD. That is, an EHT non-AP MLD that only supports 802.11be associates with only one AP MLD to establish a multi-link connection. When establishing a multi-link connection, the Link ID assigned by the AP MLD to the EHT non-AP MLD is still uniformly assigned by the Virtual MLD MAC, avoiding Link ID conflicts that would otherwise occur if Link IDs were independently assigned to the EHT non-AP MLD.

[0328] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC sublayer in the first virtual AP MLD may include the following functions:

[0329] Management of authentication, association, and reassociation (between AP MLD and non-AP MLD)

[0330] Management of AP MLD's SN / PN assignment for frames to be encrypted by PTK for unicast frames;

[0331] Management of AP MLD's Power save buffering of individually addressed frames (only on AP MLD);

[0332] Selection of the MLD upper MAC sublayer for transmission;

[0333] Merging reception of MPDUs from two or more links from different AP MLDs.

[0334] Reordering of packets of AP MLDs to ensure in-order delivery per each Block Ack session;

[0335] Management of AP MLD's Block Ack scoreboarding for individually addressed frames (in collaboration with the MLD upper MAC sublayer and the MLD lower MAC sublayer). Optionally, the Virtual MLD MAC delivers the Block Ack record on one link to the MLD upper MAC sublayer and the MLD lower MAC sublayer of other links.

[0336] MLD level management information exchange / indication via the MLD upper MAC sublayer;

[0337] Coordination of distribution and management of EDCA parameters across the MLD upper sublayer of the links.

[0338] In some embodiments, the MLD upper MAC sublayer in the first virtual AP MLD may include the following functions:

[0339] Authentication, association, and reassociation (between an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD);

[0340] Security associations (e.g., pairwise master key security association, pairwise transient key security association, and group temporal key (GTK) distribution or integrity group temporal key (IGTK) distribution or beacon integrity group temporal key (BIGTK));

[0341] SN / PN assignment for frames to be encrypted by PTK for unicast frames;

[0342] SN assignment for group addressed MSDUs;

[0343] Power save buffering of individually addressed frames (only on AP MLD);

[0344] Encryption / decryption using PTK for unicast frames;

[0345] Selection of the MLD lower MAC sublayer for transmission;

[0346] Merging reception of MPDUs from two or more links;

[0347] Reordering of packets to ensure in-order delivery per each Block Ack session;

[0348] Block Ack scoreboarding for individually addressed frames (in collaboration with the MLD lower MAC sublayer). Optionally, the MLD upper MAC sublayer delivers the Block Ack record on one link to the MLD lower MAC sublayer of other links.

[0349] MLD level management information exchange / indication via the MLD lower MAC sublayer;

[0350] Coordination of distribution and management of EDCA parameters across the MLD lower MAC sublayers of the links.

[0351] In some embodiments, the auxiliary (non-MLO) upper MAC sublayer in the first virtual AP MLD may include the following functions:

[0352] Non-MLO peer operations, above the MLD lower MAC sublayer;

[0353] Maintenance of link specific GTK / IGTK / BIGTK (between an AP affiliated with the AP MLD and a non-AP STA affiliated with the non-AP MLD);

[0354] Link specific encryption / decryption / integrity protection and PN assignment using GTK / IGTK / BIGTK (between an AP affiliated with the AP MLD and a non-AP STA affiliated with the non-AP MLD);

[0355] Link-specific management info exchange / indication (eg, Beacon);

[0356] Power save buffering of group addressed frames.

[0357] In some embodiments, the MLD lower MAC sublayer in the first virtual AP MLD may include the following functions:

[0358] Link specific control information exchange / indication (e.g., RTS / CTS, acknowledgments, NDP, etc.);

[0359] Power save state and mode;

[0360] MAC address filtering for frame reception;

[0361] Block Ack scoreboarding for individually addressed frames (in collaboration with the MLD upper MAC sublayer). Optionally, the MLD lower MAC sublayer receives the Block Ack record on the other links from the MLD upper MAC sublayer.

[0362] It is worth noting that the Virtual MLD MAC and the MLD Upper MAC are connected by the MAC service access point (SAP) through the distribution system (DS). When the DS delivers the MAC service tuples to an AP MLD through the distribution system access function (DSAF), the (coordinator of) Virtual AP MLD then determines when and how to deliver the MAC service tuples to the AP MLD's MLD upper MAC sublayer (via the MAC SAP).

[0363] Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, multi-AP MLD joint channel detection under the first virtual AP MLD can be implemented.

[0364] FIG20 is a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 300 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG20 , the wireless communication method 300 may include at least part of the following contents:

[0365] S310: A first AP MLD sends first information to a first non-AP MLD. The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, and multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability. The first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, where s and w are both positive integers.

[0366] S320: The first non-AP MLD receives the first information sent by the first AP MLD.

[0367] In some embodiments, an AP MLD may belong to one or more virtual AP MLDs.

[0368] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD should have only one master AP MLD (Master AP MLD), and the remaining AP MLDs are slave AP MLDs (Slave AP MLDs).

[0369] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD may support one or more multi-AP MLD cooperation modes.

[0370] In the embodiments of the present application, a “field” may also be referred to as a “field” or a “subfield.” A field may occupy one or more bytes (byte / octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).

[0371] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD. Of course, in some embodiments, the first AP MLD may also be a slave AP MLD, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

[0372] In an embodiment of the present application, a schematic diagram of multiple AP MLDs using multiple links for cooperative transmission can be shown in FIG7 . Multiple AP MLDs cooperate to achieve non-AP MLD uninterrupted roaming / handover. Non-AP MLD 1 establishes Link 1 and Link 2 with AP MLD 1, and non-AP MLD 1 establishes Link 3 with AP MLD 2. When non-AP MLD 1 moves away from AP MLD 1 and approaches AP MLD 2, Link 1 and Link 2 may be disconnected due to poor signal quality due to the long distance, or non-AP MLD 1 detects that the received signal strength indicator (RSSI) of AP MLD 1 is lower than a set threshold. At this time, AP MLD 1 and / or AP MLD 2 may carry a reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element) in a beacon frame and / or a probe response frame to announce that the AP MLD removes the affiliated APs corresponding to Link 1 and Link 2. However, non-AP MLD AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2's Link 3 remain connected. AP MLD 2 can remap the data on Link 1 and Link 2 to Link 3 through the traffic identifier (TID)-to-link mapping mechanism. AP MLD 2 can then continue to provide services to non-AP MLD 1 over Link 3, enabling uninterrupted roaming for non-AP MLD 1 and ensuring communication reliability.

[0373] In some embodiments, the s links are interrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD, and the w links are uninterrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD.

[0374] In some embodiments, the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and a second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0375] In some embodiments, the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and a second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0376] In some embodiments, the first information is a TID-to-Link Mapping element; wherein the TID-to-Link Mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, wherein a Link Mapping Of TID n field in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate a link mapped by TID n, where n is a non-negative integer.

[0377] In some embodiments, the link map field of the TID in the link map field of the at least one TID occupies k bytes, where k is a positive integer and k>2. Optionally, k=32.

[0378] In some embodiments, the TID-to-link mapping element may be as shown in FIG. 21 , which includes the following fields: an element identification field (occupies 1 byte), a length field (occupies 1 byte), an element identification extension field (occupies 1 byte), a TID-to-link mapping control field (occupies 1 or 2 bytes), a mapping switch time field (occupies 0 or 2 bytes), an expected duration (occupies 0 or 3 bytes), a link mapping field for TID 0 (occupies 0 or 32 bytes), a link mapping field for TID 1 (occupies 0 or 32 bytes), ..., a link mapping field for TID 7 (occupies 0 or 32 bytes). The TID-to-Link Mapping Control field may be as shown in FIG22 , which includes the following fields: a Direction field (occupies 2 bits), a Default Link Mapping field (occupies 1 bit), a Mapping Switch Time Present field (occupies 1 bit), an Expected Duration Present field (occupies 1 bit), and a Link Mapping Presence Indicator (occupies 0 or 8 bits). Specifically, a value of 1 in bit position i (where i=0, 1, ..., 254) of the Link Mapping Of TID n field indicates that TID n is mapped to the link associated with the link ID i for the direction as specified in the Direction subfield. A value of 0 in bit position i indicates that the TID n is not mapped to the link associated with the link ID i.When the Default Link Mapping subfield is set to 1, this field is not present.

[0379] In some embodiments, the first information is carried by a beacon frame or a probe response frame, that is, a TID-to-link mapping element is carried by a beacon frame or a probe response frame.

[0380] In some embodiments, when the first information is carried by a beacon frame, the beacon frame also includes a reconfiguration multi-link element; or, when the first information is carried by a probe response frame, the probe response frame also includes a reconfiguration multi-link element; wherein the reconfiguration multi-link element is used to declare the release or disconnection of the connection between the affiliated APs corresponding to the s links.

[0381] In some embodiments, the link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element includes at least one single-site STA overview field;

[0382] The link identifier field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field are used to jointly indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration.

[0383] In some embodiments, the link identifier field occupies the first Q1 bits of the single STA summary field, and the link identifier extension field occupies the last Q2 bits of the single STA summary field, where Q1 and Q2 are both positive integers, for example, Q1=4, Q2=4.

[0384] In some embodiments, the format of the Multi-Link element is shown in Figure 23. The element identifier (Element ID) = 255, which, together with the element identifier extension field (Element ID Extension field), indicates the identifier corresponding to the Multi-Link element. When Element ID = 107, it uniquely determines that the current element is a Multi-Link element. The length field (Length field) is used to indicate the length of the current element. The Multi-Link Control (Multi-Link Control) field is shown in Figure 24, wherein the type (Type) field is used to indicate the subtype of the current Multi-Link element, the presence bitmap (Presence Bitmap) field is used to indicate which fields exist in the common information field (Common Info field) of the Multi-Link element, and the link information field (Link Info field) carries MLD link-related information. The length and content are variable and include one or more subelements. Specifically, the value meaning of the Type field in the Multi-Link Control (Multi-Link Control) field can be as shown in Table 2. When Type = 2 in the Multi-Link Control (Multi-Link Control) field indicates that the Multi-Link element is a reconfiguration multi-link element (Reconfiguration Multi-Link element). Optionally, the Link Info field of the Reconfiguration Multi-Link element contains one or more single STA profile (Per-STA Profile) sub-elements, where the format of the Per-STA Profile sub-element is shown in Figure 25, and the format of the STA control field is shown in Figure 26. The first 4 bits (Link ID) are used to indicate the link identifier, and 4 of the last 9 reserved bits are defined as the link identifier extension (Link ID Extension), which are combined with the first 4 bits (Link ID) to indicate the link identifier.

[0385] Table 2

[0386] In some embodiments, the frame body structure of the beacon frame may be as shown in FIG. 27 , where the (reconfiguration) multilink element carried by the beacon frame sent by the first AP MLD announces the removal of one / certain Affiliated APs, and / or the TID-To-Link Mapping element carried by the beacon frame sent by the first AP MLD remaps the data / TID.

[0387] In some embodiments, the frame body structure of the probe response frame may be as shown in FIG. 28 . The (reconfiguration) multilink element carried by the probe response frame sent by the first AP MLD announces the removal of one or more Affiliated APs, and / or the TID-To-Link Mapping element carried by the probe response frame sent by the first AP MLD remaps data / TID.

[0388] In some embodiments, the first information is carried by a TID-to-link mapping request frame; wherein the action field in the TID-to-link mapping request frame includes a TID-to-link mapping element; wherein the first information is the TID-to-link mapping element, and the TID-to-link mapping element includes a link mapping field of at least one TID, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped to TID n.

[0389] For example, the Action field of a TID-to-link Mapping Request frame may be as shown in FIG. 29 . The Action field includes a TID-To-Link Mapping element, which is used to indicate a mapping relationship between a TID and a link.

[0390] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD receives a TID-to-link Mapping Response frame sent by the first non-AP MLD; wherein the action field in the TID-to-link mapping response frame includes a TID-to-link mapping element; wherein the TID-to-link mapping element includes a link mapping field of at least one TID, and a link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate a link mapped to TID n.

[0391] For example, the Action field of the TID-to-link Mapping Response frame may be as shown in FIG30 . The Action field includes a TID-To-Link Mapping element, which is used to indicate a mapping relationship between the TID and the link.

[0392] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD sends a beacon frame or a probe response frame to the first non-AP MLD;

[0393] The beacon frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element, or the probe response frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element;

[0394] The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

[0395] In some embodiments, the link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element includes at least one single-site STA overview field;

[0396] The link identifier field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field are used to jointly indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration.

[0397] In some embodiments, the link identifier field occupies the first Q1 bits of the single STA summary field, and the link identifier extension field occupies the last Q2 bits of the single STA summary field, where Q1 and Q2 are both positive integers, for example, Q1=4, Q2=4.

[0398] In some embodiments, for a scenario where multiple AP MLDs use multiple links for coordinated transmission as shown in FIG7 , the multi-AP MLD collaboration can implement a non-AP MLD 1 hitless roaming / handover process, as shown in FIG31 , which is mainly divided into the following steps:

[0399] Step 1a: Because non-AP MLD 1 has established Link 1 and Link 2 with AP MLD 1, and Link 3 with AP MLD 2, AP MLD 1 sends data to non-AP MLD 1 through Link 1 and Link 2, and AP MLD 2 sends data to non-AP MLD 1 through Link 3. If non-AP MLD 1 moves away from AP MLD 1 and closer to AP MLD 2, Link 1 and Link 2 may be disconnected due to poor signal quality due to the long distance.

[0400] Step 1b: The STA can send an Outage frame (or other frame carrying the MAC address and / or Link ID of the AP MLD that has experienced an outage) to AP MLD 2 to inform AP MLD 1 that Link 1 and Link 2 established with non-AP MLD 1 have been interrupted. (This step is optional.)

[0401] Step 2: AP MLD 1 disconnects Link 1 and Link 2 from non-AP MLD 1. AP MLD 1 and / or AP MLD 2 remap the data on Link 1 and Link 2 to Link 3. This can be accomplished through Step 2a and / or Step 2b.

[0402] Step 2a: AP MLD 1 and / or AP MLD 2 sends a Beacon frame / Probe Response frame to non-AP MLD 1. This frame may carry a Reconfiguration Multi-Link element to announce that AP MLD 1 has removed the affiliated APs corresponding to Link 1 and Link 2. This frame may also carry a TID-To-Link Mapping element to remap the data on Link 1 and Link 2 to Link 3. Note: If this frame carries a TID-To-Link Mapping element to remap the data on Link 1 and Link 2 to Link 3, Step 2a is not required.

[0403] Step 2b: AP MLD 2 sends a TID-to-link Mapping Request frame to non-AP MLD 1 to remap the data on Link 1 and Link 2 to Link 3. Non-AP MLD 1 responds to AP MLD 2's request with a TID-to-link Mapping Response frame. Step 2b can be performed without performing step 2a.

[0404] Step 3: AP MLD 2 continues to send data to non-AP MLD 1 using Link 3.

[0405] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD determines that the s links are interrupted based on link quality of the s links, or the first AP MLD determines that the s links are interrupted based on location information or displacement information of the first non-AP MLD.

[0406] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD receives second information sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the second information is used to indicate that the s links are interrupted. Optionally, the second information is carried by an interruption frame.

[0407] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD receives third information sent by other AP MLDs, where the third information is used to indicate that the s links are interrupted.

[0408] In some embodiments, the second information or the third information includes at least one of the following: identifiers of the s links, MAC addresses of AP MLDs corresponding to the s links, and MAC addresses of APs corresponding to the s links.

[0409] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0410] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD MAC;

[0411] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0412] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0413] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0414] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD may be as shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 19 . For details, reference may be made to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200 , which will not be repeated here.

[0415] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0416] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0417] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate APs of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0418] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0419] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0420] Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, non-AP MLD uninterrupted roaming under the first virtual AP MLD can be achieved.

[0421] FIG32 is a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 400 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG32 , the wireless communication method 400 may include at least part of the following contents:

[0422] S410: A first AP MLD sends a data sharing announcement frame to at least one AP MLD, wherein the first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the at least one AP MLD includes a second AP MLD. The data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and the non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs.

[0423] S420, the second AP MLD receives the data sharing announcement frame sent by the first AP MLD;

[0424] S430, the first AP MLD sends the shared data using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame;

[0425] S440: The second AP MLD receives the shared data sent by the first AP MLD using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

[0426] In the embodiment of the present application, the operation of the AP MLD in the at least one AP MLD is consistent with that of the second AP MLD. For details, reference may be made to the second AP MLD, which will not be described again.

[0427] In some embodiments, an AP MLD may belong to one or more virtual AP MLDs.

[0428] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD should have only one master AP MLD (Master AP MLD), and the remaining AP MLDs are slave AP MLDs (Slave AP MLDs).

[0429] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD may support one or more multi-AP MLD cooperation modes.

[0430] In the embodiments of the present application, a “field” may also be referred to as a “field” or a “subfield.” A field may occupy one or more bytes (byte / octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).

[0431] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD. Of course, in some embodiments, the first AP MLD may also be a slave AP MLD, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

[0432] In an embodiment of the present application, a schematic diagram of multiple AP MLDs using multiple links for collaborative transmission can be shown in Figure 7. When AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 jointly transmit data for non-AP MLD 1 and non-AP MLD 2, AP MLD 1, acting as the Master AP MLD, needs to share the data of non-AP MLD 1 and / or non-AP MLD 2 with AP MLD 2, acting as the Slave AP MLD, in advance via a backhaul link. If wireless links are used for data sharing between multiple AP MLDs, the AP MLDs can share data via any one or more commonly supported links. Specifically, AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 can share data using any one or more of the supported links. For example, AP MLD 1 establishes 2.4 GHz link 1 and 6 GHz link 2 with non-AP MLD 1; AP MLD 2 establishes 2.4 GHz link 3 with non-AP MLD 1, and establishes 5 GHz link 4 and 60 GHz link 5 with non-AP MLD 2. Then, the wireless (backhaul) link between AP MLD 1 and AP MLD 2 can use the 6 GHz link with less spectrum interference and larger available channel bandwidth, thereby ensuring stable and high-speed backhaul between AP MLDs.

[0433] In some embodiments, the data sharing announcement field in the data sharing announcement frame includes a link identification information field and a multi-link device MLD MAC address field; wherein the link information field is used to indicate the link information for transmitting the shared data, and the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MAC address of the non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs.

[0434] Specifically, the frame format of the Data Sharing Announce frame can be shown in Figure 33, where the Link Info field can be used to indicate which link is used for data sharing between AP MLDs; the MLD MAC Address is used to indicate the MAC address of the non-AP MLD, that is, which non-AP MLD the shared data comes from.

[0435] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD receives ACK frames fed back by some or all of the at least one AP MLD, where the ACK frames are used to indicate that the corresponding AP MLD successfully receives the shared data.

[0436] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD shares data of at least one non-AP MLD with the at least one AP MLD through a backhaul link.

[0437] In some embodiments, when multiple AP MLDs perform joint transmission (J-TX), all participating AP MLDs should have data for the target non-AP MLD. This requires the Master AP MLD (or Slave AP MLD) to pass the data for the target non-AP MLD to all participating AP MLDs via the backhaul link. For the scenario in which multiple AP MLDs perform collaborative transmission using multiple links, as shown in Figure 7 , AP MLD 1, acting as the Master AP MLD, has data for the target non-AP MLD for joint transmission. To pass the data for the non-AP MLD to AP MLD 2 participating in the joint transmission, the following steps are performed, as shown in Figure 34 :

[0438] Step 1: AP MLD 1 sends a Data Sharing Announce frame to AP MLD 2, informing AP MLD 2 which link it should use to receive data from which non-AP MLD.

[0439] Step 2: AP MLD 1 uses the link indicated by the Data Sharing Announce frame to send the target non-AP MLD data to AP MLD 2.

[0440] Step 3: After receiving the data, AP MLD 2 sends an Ack to AP MLD 1 for confirmation.

[0441] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0442] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD MAC;

[0443] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0444] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0445] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0446] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD may be as shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 19 . For details, reference may be made to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200 , which will not be repeated here.

[0447] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0448] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0449] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate APs of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0450] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0451] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0452] Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, data sharing between multiple AP MLDs under the first virtual AP MLD can be achieved.

[0453] FIG35 is a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 500 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG35 , the wireless communication method 500 may include at least part of the following contents:

[0454] S510: A first AP MLD sends a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame to at least one AP MLD; wherein the first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission capability, the at least one AP MLD and the first AP MLD jointly participate in multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for a first non-AP MLD, the at least one AP MLD includes a second AP MLD, and the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is used to indicate links, cooperative modes, and transmission parameters used by the AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

[0455] S520: The second AP MLD receives the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame sent by the first AP MLD.

[0456] In some embodiments, an AP MLD may belong to one or more virtual AP MLDs.

[0457] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD should have only one master AP MLD (Master AP MLD), and the remaining AP MLDs are slave AP MLDs (Slave AP MLDs).

[0458] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD may support one or more multi-AP MLD cooperation modes.

[0459] In the embodiments of the present application, a “field” may also be referred to as a “field” or a “subfield.” A field may occupy one or more bytes (byte / octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).

[0460] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD. Of course, in some embodiments, the first AP MLD may also be a slave AP MLD, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

[0461] In an embodiment of the present application, a schematic diagram of multiple AP MLDs using multiple links for collaborative transmission can be shown in Figure 7. After completing channel detection and data sharing, the AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission can simultaneously transmit data to one or more non-AP MLDs. As shown in Figure 36, AP MLD 1 uses Link 1 and Link 2, and AP MLD 2 uses Link 3 to transmit data to non-AP MLD 1. As shown in Figure 36, the specific steps may include:

[0462] Step 1: AP MLD 1, acting as the Master AP MLD, sends a Multi-AP MLD Transmission Trigger frame to the Slave AP MLDs participating in the joint transmission (e.g., AP MLD 2), triggering them to simultaneously send data frames. The Multi-AP MLD Transmission Trigger frame instructs each participating AP MLD on which link to use, in what collaborative mode, and with what parameters to send data frames.

[0463] Step 2: The AP MLDs participating in the joint transmission simultaneously send data frames to the target non-AP MLD on the corresponding links using the specified cooperation mode and parameters as instructed by the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame. For example, AP MLD 1 uses Link 1 and Link 2 to send data frames to non-AP MLD 1, AP MLD 2 uses Link 3 to send data frames to non-AP MLD 1, and AP MLD 2 uses Link 4 and Link 5 to send data frames to non-AP MLD 2. The data frames sent by AP MLD 1 using Link 1 and AP MLD 2 using Link 3 to non-AP MLD 1 are sent on the same frequency band / channel, so the J-TX cooperation mode needs to be adopted.

[0464] Step 3: The non-AP MLD that receives the data sent by the AP MLD replies with an acknowledgment frame (Ack frame) to the corresponding AP MLD.

[0465] In some embodiments, the user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an association identifier AID field and a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field.

[0466] In some embodiments, the user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an AID field and a user information field related to the trigger frame, and the user information field related to the trigger frame includes a multi-link field or a basic multi-link field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, the multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the basic multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field.

[0467] In some embodiments, the frame format of the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame may be as shown in FIG37 . The multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is a variant of the Trigger frame and includes a Common Info field and a User Info List field. The User Info List field includes a Special User Info field and / or one or more User Info fields. The Common Info field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame may be as shown in FIG38 . The Trigger Type field is set to a value between 9 and 15 (e.g., 9) to indicate that the Trigger frame is a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame, used to trigger one or more APs to perform coordinated MLD transmission.

[0468] Specifically, the Common Info field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes the following fields: trigger type field (occupies 4 bits), downlink length field (occupies 12 bits), more trigger frames (Trigger frame, TF) field (occupies 1 bit), carrier sense (Carrier Sense, CS) required (occupies 1 bit), downlink bandwidth (BandWidth, BW) (occupies 2 bits), Guard Interval (Guard Interval, GI) and EHT Long Training Field (EHT-LTF) type (occupies 2 bits), EHT-LTF symbol number (occupies 3 bits), low-density parity check (LDPC) additional symbol segment (occupies 1 bit), pre-forward error correction (Pre-FEC) padding role (occupies 2 bits), packet extension (Packet Extension, PE) disambiguation (occupies 1 bit), high efficiency (occupies 1 bit), and the number of symbols in the EHT-LTF field. Efficiency, HE) / EHT main 160 field (occupies 1 bit), special user information field tag (Special User Info Field Flag) (occupies 1 bit), EHT reserved (occupies 7 bits), trigger-associated general information field (the number of bits occupied is variable).

[0469] Specifically, the format of the User Info field is shown in Figure 15, where AID12 is used to indicate the address (least significant 12 bits) of the AP MLD participating in multi-AP MLD coordinated transmission. This application proposes using eight reserved bits, B25 and B32-B38, to define the Link Info field (including a 4-bit Link ID subfield and a 4-bit Link ID Extension subfield), to indicate which link the AP MLD needs to use for multi-AP MLD coordinated transmission. It is worth noting that in this case, the User Info field can only indicate the ID of a single link. Alternatively, the Trigger Dependent User Info field of the User Info field can carry the (Basic) Multi-Link element. Since the (Basic) Multi-Link element contains the Link ID and Link ID Extension, it can indicate which link(s) the AP MLD needs to use for multi-AP MLD coordinated transmission. It is worth noting that in this case, the (Basic) Multi-Link element carried in the Trigger Dependent User Info subfield of the User Info field can indicate the IDs of one or more links.

[0470] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD sends a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame.

[0471] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD receives an acknowledgment frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the acknowledgment frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD has successfully received the data frame sent by the first AP MLD.

[0472] In some embodiments, the second AP MLD sends a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame.

[0473] In some embodiments, the second AP MLD receives an acknowledgment frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the acknowledgment frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD has successfully received the data frame sent by the second AP MLD.

[0474] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0475] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD MAC;

[0476] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0477] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0478] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0479] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD may be as shown in FIG. 18 or FIG. 19 . For details, reference may be made to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200 , which will not be repeated here.

[0480] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0481] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0482] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate APs of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0483] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0484] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0485] Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission under the first virtual AP MLD can be implemented.

[0486] FIG39 is a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 600 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG39 , the wireless communication method 600 may include at least part of the following contents:

[0487] S610, a first AP sends or receives a multi-AP detection announcement frame;

[0488] The multi-AP detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple APs perform channel detection, the time when multiple APs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple APs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple APs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple APs performing channel detection;

[0489] The first AP belongs to a second virtual AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, and the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0490] In the embodiment of the present application, multi-AP joint channel detection can be implemented.

[0491] In the embodiment of the present application, in the above S610, when the first AP sends a multi-AP detection announcement frame, the first AP may be a master AP (Master AP); when the first AP receives a multi-AP detection announcement frame, the first AP may be a slave AP (Slave AP).

[0492] In some embodiments, an AP may belong to one or more virtual AP MLDs.

[0493] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD should have only one master AP (Master AP), and the remaining APs are slave APs (Slave APs).

[0494] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD may support one or more multi-AP cooperation modes.

[0495] In the embodiments of the present application, a “field” may also be referred to as a “field” or a “subfield.” A field may occupy one or more bytes (byte / octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).

[0496] In some embodiments, the first AP is a master AP. Of course, in some embodiments, the first AP may also be a slave AP, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

[0497] In some embodiments, the multi-AP detection announcement frame multi-AP detection announcement field includes at least one of the following: VBSSID field, cooperation set identification field, detection method field, detection configuration field;

[0498] Among them, the VBSSID field is used to indicate the VBSSID of the second virtual AP MLD, the collaboration set identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the multi-AP MLD collaboration set corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD, the detection method field is used to indicate the method for the multiple APs to perform channel detection, and the detection configuration field is used to indicate the configuration information for the multiple APs to perform channel detection.

[0499] In some embodiments, the detection method field includes at least one of: a sequential or joint field, an explicit or implicit field;

[0500] The first value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple APs perform channel sounding in sequence, and the second value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple APs perform channel sounding simultaneously.

[0501] The explicit or implicit field takes a first value to instruct the multiple APs to perform explicit channel sounding, and the explicit or implicit field takes a second value to instruct the multiple APs to perform implicit channel sounding.

[0502] For example, the sequence or joint field = 1 indicates that multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, and the sequence or joint field = 0 indicates that multiple APs perform channel detection simultaneously and synchronously; or, the sequence or joint field = 0 indicates that multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, and the sequence or joint field = 1 indicates that multiple APs perform channel detection simultaneously and synchronously.

[0503] For example, the explicit or implicit field = 1 indicates that multiple APs perform explicit channel detection, and the explicit or implicit field = 0 indicates that multiple APs perform implicit channel detection; or, the explicit or implicit field = 0 indicates that multiple APs perform explicit channel detection, and the explicit or implicit field = 1 indicates that multiple APs perform implicit channel detection.

[0504] In some embodiments, when the sequence or combination field indicates that the multiple APs perform channel sounding in sequence, the time and / or sequence in which the multiple APs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

[0505] In some embodiments, when the order or joint field indicates that the multiple APs perform channel sounding simultaneously, the time when the multiple APs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

[0506] In some embodiments, Explicit or Implicit subfield = 0: instructs multiple APs to perform explicit channel sounding, that is, the AP sends NDPA+NDP frame, and the non-AP MLD needs to feedback the channel sounding result; Explicit or Implicit subfield = 1: instructs multiple APs to perform implicit channel sounding, that is, the non-AP MLD sends NDP frame, and the AP directly obtains the channel sounding result.

[0507] In some embodiments, the detection configuration field includes at least one of the following: an AP number field, a plurality of AP detection configuration fields;

[0508] The AP number field is used to indicate the number of APs participating in multi-AP channel detection, and the mth AP detection configuration field in the multiple AP detection configuration fields is used to indicate configuration information of the mth AP participating in multi-AP channel detection.

[0509] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the order of the AP detection configuration fields in the multiple AP detection configuration fields indicates the order in which the corresponding APs perform multi-AP channel detection.

[0510] In some embodiments, the AP detection configuration field in the plurality of AP detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP identification field, a start time field, and a basic multilink element;

[0511] Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the AP identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field for multi-AP channel detection, and the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the link information used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

[0512] In some embodiments, the AP detection configuration field in the plurality of AP detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP identification field, a start time field, and a link identification information field;

[0513] Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the AP identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field for multi-AP channel detection, and the link identification information field is used to indicate the link information used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

[0514] In some embodiments, the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[0515] Among them, in the case where the link identification information field only includes the link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the link identification information field only includes the link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the link identification information field includes the link identification field and the link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

[0516] In some embodiments, the frame format of the multi-AP detection announcement frame can be shown in Figure 40, wherein the multi-AP detection announcement frame includes a frame control field (occupies 2 bytes), a duration field (occupies 2 bytes), a receiving address (RA) (occupies 6 bytes), a sending address (TA) (occupies 6 bytes), a multi-AP detection announcement frame field (the number of bytes occupied is variable), and a frame check sequence (FCS) field (occupies 4 bytes). Specifically, the multi-AP detection announcement frame field includes: a VBSSID field (occupies 0 or 6 bytes), a collaborative set identifier or VBSS color field (occupies 0 or 1 byte), a detection method field (occupies 1 byte), and a detection configuration field (the number of bytes occupied is variable). Among them, the detection method field field includes: a sequential or joint field (occupies 1 bit) and an explicit or implicit field (occupies 1 bit). Among them, the detection configuration field includes: an AP number field (occupies 1 byte), 1 st AP detection configuration field, 2 nd AP detection configuration field, ..., m thAP detection configuration field. The AP detection configuration field includes: BSSID field (occupies 6 bytes), AP identification field (occupies 1 byte), start time field (occupies 1 byte), basic multi-link element (occupies a variable number of bytes); or, the AP detection configuration field includes: BSSID field (occupies 6 bytes), AP identification field (occupies 1 byte), start time field (occupies 1 byte), link identification information field (occupies 1 byte); wherein, the link identification information field includes the link identification field (occupies 4 bits) and the link identification extension field (occupies 4 bits).

[0517] It should be noted that in Figure 40, the Basic Multi-Link element is used to indicate the link information used by the current AP when performing multi-AP channel detection, etc.; the Basic Multi-Link element contains more unnecessary information, or can be replaced by the Link ID Info subfield. In Figure 40, the Link ID Info field is used to indicate the link information used by the current AP when performing multi-AP channel detection, or can be replaced by the Basic Multi-Link element.

[0518] In some embodiments, the first non-AP MLD receives a second frame sent by the first AP;

[0519] The second frame is sent by the first AP according to the information indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame, the first non-AP MLD is the non-AP MLD associated with the first AP among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, and the second frame is an NDPA frame or a detection trigger frame;

[0520] The multi-AP detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple APs perform channel detection, the time when multiple APs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple APs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple APs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple APs performing channel detection;

[0521] Wherein, in the case where the second frame is an NDPA frame, the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of a Null Data Physical Protocol Data Unit NDP frame sent subsequently;

[0522] Wherein, in the case that the second frame is a detection trigger frame, the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result.

[0523] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs include the first AP and the multiple APs perform explicit channel sounding, the first AP sends an empty data physical protocol data unit announcement NDPA frame to a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP sounding announcement frame, wherein the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of an empty data physical protocol data unit NDP frame to be sent subsequently, and the first non-AP MLD is the non-AP MLD associated with the first AP among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel sounding; and the first AP sends an NDP frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent, wherein the time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is not less than one SIFS.

[0524] In some embodiments, the NDPA frame includes a non-AP MLD information list field, and the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field;

[0525] Among them, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP for multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP for multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the link identifier used by the first AP for multi-AP channel detection.

[0526] In some embodiments, when the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame and the AP co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD covers all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the first AP sends a BFRP trigger frame to all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent. The BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection to feedback channel detection results to the AP associated therewith; and the first AP receives the NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the NDP feedback frame includes the channel detection result of the first AP.

[0527] In some embodiments, when the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame and the APs co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the first AP sends a BFRP trigger frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback the channel detection result; and the first AP receives the NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes the channel detection result of the first AP.

[0528] In some embodiments, the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[0529] In which, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0530] In some embodiments, the NDP feedback frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

[0531] In some embodiments, the NDP feedback frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

[0532] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs perform channel sounding in sequence, the multiple APs send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP sounding announcement frame.

[0533] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel sounding, the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP sounding announcement frame.

[0534] In some embodiments, when the second frame is an NDPA frame and the multiple APs perform explicit channel detection, the first non-AP MLD receives an NDP frame sent by the first AP on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent, wherein the time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is not less than one SIFS.

[0535] In some embodiments, when the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame and the AP co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD covers all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the first non-AP MLD receives a BFRP trigger frame sent by the first AP on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent, where the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection to feedback channel detection results to the AP associated therewith; and the first non-AP MLD sends an NDP feedback frame to the first AP, where the NDP feedback frame includes the channel detection result of the first AP.

[0536] In some embodiments, when the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame and the APs co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the first non-AP MLD receives a BFRP trigger frame sent by the first AP on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback the channel detection result; and the first non-AP MLD sends an NDP feedback frame to the first AP, where the NDP feedback frame includes the channel detection result of the first AP.

[0537] In some embodiments, the frame format of the NDPA frame can refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200, the BFRP trigger frame can refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200, and the NDP feedback frame can refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200, which will not be repeated here.

[0538] In some embodiments, the process of sequential channel sounding with explicit feedback can refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200, and the process of joint channel sounding with explicit feedback can refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200, which will not be repeated here.

[0539] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs include the first AP and the multiple APs perform implicit channel sounding, the first AP sends a sounding trigger frame to a first non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP sounding announcement frame, wherein the sounding trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel sounding result, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel sounding; and the first AP receives an NDP frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the NDP frame includes the channel sounding result of the first AP.

[0540] In some embodiments, the user information field in the detection trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, wherein the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP channel detection.

[0541] In some embodiments, the NDP frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

[0542] In some embodiments, the NDP frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

[0543] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple APs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP channel detection to send NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame.

[0544] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs simultaneously perform channel detection, the multiple APs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP channel detection to simultaneously and synchronously send NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame.

[0545] In some embodiments, when the second frame is a sounding trigger frame and the multiple APs perform implicit channel sounding, the first non-AP MLD sends an NDP frame to the first AP, wherein the NDP frame includes the channel sounding result of the first AP.

[0546] In some embodiments, the process of sequential channel sounding with implicit feedback can refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200, and the process of joint channel sounding with implicit feedback can refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 200, which will not be repeated here.

[0547] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD may be composed of subordinate APs of some or all AP MLDs in a multi-AP MLD coordination set. Optionally, the second virtual AP MLD may be a logical AP MLD.

[0548] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper MAC (Virtual MLD upper MAC);

[0549] The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all affiliated APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all affiliated APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0550] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD upper layer MAC may also be referred to as a virtual MLD MAC (Virtual MLD MAC).

[0551] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in the master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0552] In some embodiments, the subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper MAC (non-MLD Upper MAC), an MLD lower MAC (MLD Lower MAC), and a physical layer (PHY).

[0553] In some embodiments, a plurality of co-located affiliated APs in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

[0554] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD can be as shown in Figure 41. Affiliated APs 1 through 6 are six APs affiliated with the second virtual AP MLD. Each AP has a non-MLD Upper MAC, MLD Lower MAC, and PHY, but no MLD Upper MAC. To enable multi-AP collaboration, the second virtual AP MLD has a Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC. This Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC is connected to the MLD Lower MAC of Affiliated APs 1 through 6, managing and controlling these APs. As shown in Figure 41, the Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC of the second virtual AP MLD is located on a separate controller device.

[0555] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD can be as shown in Figure 42. Affiliated APs 1 through 6 are six APs affiliated with the second virtual AP MLD. Each AP has a non-MLD Upper MAC, MLD Lower MAC, and PHY, but no MLD Upper MAC. To enable multi-AP collaboration, the second virtual AP MLD has a Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC. This Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC is connected to the MLD Lower MACs of Affiliated APs 1 through 6, managing and controlling them. As shown in Figure 42, the Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC of the second virtual AP MLD is located in Affiliated AP 1. Affiliated AP 1 has a Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC that manages and controls all affiliated APs in the second virtual AP MLD. The Affiliated APs' MLD Lower MACs in the second virtual AP MLD are connected to the Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC of Affiliated AP 1.

[0556] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD can be as shown in Figure 43. Affiliated APs 1 through 6 are six APs affiliated with the second virtual AP MLD. Each AP has a non-MLD Upper MAC, an MLD Lower MAC, and a PHY, but no MLD Upper MAC. To enable multi-AP collaboration, the second virtual AP MLD has a Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC. This Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC is connected to the MLD Lower MACs of Affiliated APs 1 through 6, managing and controlling Affiliated APs 1 through 6. As shown in Figure 43, the Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC of the second virtual AP MLD is located on an independent controller device, and multiple co-located affiliated APs in the second virtual AP MLD share a single MLD Upper MAC.

[0557] Specifically, as shown in Figures 41 to 43, co-located AP1 and AP2 can establish multiple links (Link 1 and Link 2) with non-AP MLD 1 and non-AP MLD 2, respectively, and co-located AP3, AP4, AP5, and AP6 can establish multiple links (Link 3, Link 4, Link 5, and Link 6) with non-AP MLD 2, non-AP MLD 3, and non-AP MLD 4, respectively.

[0558] Optionally, as shown in Figures 41 to 43, AP2 and AP4 simultaneously provide data transmission services for non-AP MLD 2 over 5 GHz Link 2 and Link 4, respectively. This can improve the communication rate and reduce latency for non-AP MLD 2. Because signal path loss in the 5 GHz band is more severe than in the slightly lower 2.4 GHz band, communication stability for non-AP MLD 2 may be poor. Therefore, AP3 can also use 2.4 GHz Link 3 to provide services for non-AP MLD 2.

[0559] Optionally, as shown in Figures 41 to 43, since non-AP MLD 2 establishes multi-link links with AP 2, AP 3, and AP 4, when non-AP MLD 2 moves away from AP 2 and causes Link 2 to be interrupted, non-AP MLD 2 still maintains links with AP 3 and AP 4 through Link 3 and Link 4, thus achieving seamless roaming / uninterrupted switching of non-AP MLD.

[0560] In some embodiments, as shown in FIG. 41 to FIG. 43 , the second virtual AP MLD may be viewed as a two-layer network architecture.

[0561] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD upper-layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages the link allocation for the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD. Specifically, for example, a non-AP MLD sends an association request frame to the Anchor AP in the Virtual AP MLD to associate with all subordinate APs in the Virtual AP MLD and establish multiple links. The Controller in the Virtual AP MLD manages the Link ID allocation for the entire VBSS. Therefore, a Link ID that does not duplicate a previously assigned Link ID can be assigned to the non-AP MLD for multi-link communication between the non-AP MLD and the various APs in the Virtual AP MLD. That is, when multiple APs collaborate, the Controller in the Virtual AP MLD coordinates the allocation of non-AP Link IDs to the non-AP MLD and the Virtual AP MLD. This helps prevent the non-AP MLD from establishing the same Link ID with different APs, which could result in mapping errors during TID-to-Link Mapping.

[0562] In some embodiments, after the first non-AP MLD successfully associates with the target multi-AP MLD cooperation set, some of the links established between the first non-AP MLD and the multiple subordinate APs co-located with the second virtual AP MLD transmit only control plane information, and another part of the links transmit only data plane information. Alternatively, some or all of the links established between the first non-AP MLD and the multiple subordinate APs co-located with the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0563] For example, as shown in Figures 41 to 43, Link 3 between AP 3 and non-AP MLD 2 can serve only as the control plane, that is, only transmit control frames and / or management frames. Then, Link 2 between AP 2 and non-AP MLD 2, and Link 4 between AP 4 and non-AP MLD 2 can serve as the data plane, that is, used to transmit data frames. Alternatively, Link 3 between AP 3 and non-AP MLD 2 can also transmit both control frames and management frames as well as data frames. The present invention is not limited to this.

[0564] In some embodiments, after the first non-AP MLD successfully associates with the target multi-AP MLD cooperation set, the same subordinate STA of the first non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0565] In some embodiments, after the first non-AP MLD successfully associates with the target multi-AP MLD cooperation set, the multiple links corresponding to the same subordinate STA of the first non-AP MLD transmit the same PPDU, or the multiple links corresponding to the same subordinate STA of the first non-AP MLD transmit different PPDUs.

[0566] For example, as shown in Figures 41 to 43, link 2 between AP 2 and non-AP MLD 2 and link 4 between AP 4 and non-AP MLD 2 can transmit the same PPDU (i.e., exactly the same data) to improve communication reliability / stability. Alternatively, link 2 between AP 2 and non-AP MLD 2 and link 4 between AP 4 and non-AP MLD 2 can also transmit different PPDUs (i.e., different data) to improve communication rate / throughput. The present invention is not limited to this.

[0567] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishment of multi-link connections, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is assigned by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD. In other words, the EHT non-AP MLD that only supports 802.11be only associates with a group of co-located subordinate APs and establishes multi-links. When establishing multi-links, the Link ID assigned by the AP to the EHT non-AP MLD is still uniformly assigned by the Virtual MLD MAC, avoiding Link ID conflicts caused by independent Link ID assignment to the EHT non-AP MLD.

[0568] In some embodiments, the Virtual MLD (upper) MAC sublayer in the second virtual AP MLD may include the following functions:

[0569] Authentication, association, and reassociation (between an AP MLD and a non-AP MLD);

[0570] Security association (eg, PMKSA, PTKSA) and distribution of GTK / IGTK / BIGTK;

[0571] SN / PN assignment for frames to be encrypted by PTK for unicast frames;

[0572] SN assignment for group addressed MSDUs;

[0573] Power save buffering of individually addressed frames (only on AP MLD);

[0574] Encryption / decryption using PTK for unicast frames;

[0575] Selection of the MLD lower MAC sublayer for transmission;

[0576] Merging reception of MPDUs from two or more links;

[0577] Reordering of packets to ensure in-order delivery per each Block Ack session;

[0578] Block Ack scoreboarding for individually addressed frames (in collaboration with the MLD lower MAC sublayer). Optionally, the MLD upper MAC sublayer delivers the Block Ack record on one link to the MLD lower MAC sublayer of other links;

[0579] MLD level management information exchange / indication via the MLD lower MAC sublayer;

[0580] Coordination of distribution and management of EDCA parameters across the MLD lower MAC sublayers of the links.

[0581] In some embodiments, the secondary (non-MLO) upper MAC sublayer (AP only) in the second virtual AP MLD may include the following functions:

[0582] Non-MLO peer operations, above the MLD lower MAC sublayer;

[0583] Maintenance of link specific GTK / IGTK / BIGTK (between an AP affiliated with the AP MLD and a non-AP STA affiliated with the non-AP MLD);

[0584] Link specific encryption / decryption / integrity protection and PN assignment using GTK / IGTK / BIGTK (between an AP affiliated with the AP MLD and a non-AP STA affiliated with the non-AP MLD);

[0585] Link-specific management info exchange / indication (eg, Beacon);

[0586] Power save buffering of group addressed frames.

[0587] In some embodiments, the MLD lower MAC sublayer in the second virtual AP MLD may include the following functions:

[0588] Link specific control information exchange / indication (eg, RTS / CTS, acknowledgments, NDP, etc.);

[0589] Power save state and mode;

[0590] MAC address filtering for frame reception;

[0591] Block Ack scoreboarding for individually addressed frames (in collaboration with the MLD upper MAC sublayer). Optionally, the MLD lower MAC sublayer receives the Block Ack record on the other links from the MLD upper MAC sublayer.

[0592] Specifically, in the embodiments of the present application, in the three-layer network architecture shown in Figures 18 and 19, each AP MLD under the Virtual AP MLD is a complete MLD device. The Virtual AP MLD's Virtual MLD MAC manages and controls the MLD Upper MAC of these AP MLDs, and the synchronization requirements between the AP MLDs and between the AP MLD and the Virtual AP MLD are relatively low. In the two-layer network architecture shown in Figures 41 to 43, the Virtual AP MLD's Virtual MLD (Upper) MAC directly manages and controls the MLD Lower MAC of each affiliated AP. Therefore, the synchronization requirements between the affiliated APs and between the affiliated AP and the Virtual AP MLD are relatively high.

[0593] Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, multi-AP MLD joint channel detection under the second virtual AP MLD can be implemented.

[0594] FIG44 is a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 700 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG44 , the wireless communication method 700 may include at least part of the following contents:

[0595] S710: A first AP sends first information to a first non-AP MLD; the first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links; the first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device (AP MLD); multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability; the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD; and both s and w are positive integers.

[0596] S720: The first non-AP MLD receives the first information sent by the first AP.

[0597] In some embodiments, an AP may belong to one or more virtual AP MLDs.

[0598] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD should have only one master AP (Master AP), and the remaining APs are slave APs (Slave APs).

[0599] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD may support one or more multi-AP cooperation modes.

[0600] In the embodiments of the present application, a “field” may also be referred to as a “field” or a “subfield.” A field may occupy one or more bytes (byte / octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).

[0601] In some embodiments, the first AP is a master AP. Of course, in some embodiments, the first AP may also be a slave AP, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

[0602] In some embodiments, the s links are interrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD, and the w links are uninterrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD.

[0603] In some embodiments, the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP in the second virtual AP MLD that is co-located with the first AP, and the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP in the second virtual AP MLD that is co-located with the second AP.

[0604] In some embodiments, the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP in the second virtual AP MLD that is co-located with the first AP, and the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP in the second virtual AP MLD that is co-located with the second AP.

[0605] In some embodiments, the first information is a TID-to-link mapping element;

[0606] The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n, where n is a non-negative integer.

[0607] In some embodiments, the link map field of the TID in the link map field of the at least one TID occupies k bytes, where k is a positive integer and k>2. Optionally, k=32.

[0608] In some embodiments, the TID-to-link mapping element may refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 300, which will not be repeated here.

[0609] In some embodiments, the first information is carried via a beacon frame or a probe response frame.

[0610] In some embodiments, when the first information is carried by a beacon frame, the beacon frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; or, when the first information is carried by a probe response frame, the probe response frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element;

[0611] The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

[0612] In some embodiments, the first information is carried by a TID-to-link mapping request frame;

[0613] Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping request frame includes a TID to link mapping element;

[0614] The first information is the TID-to-link mapping element, which includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n.

[0615] In some embodiments, the first AP receives a TID-to-link mapping response frame sent by the first non-AP MLD;

[0616] Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping response frame includes a TID to link mapping element;

[0617] The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n.

[0618] In some embodiments, the first AP sends a beacon frame or a probe response frame to the first non-AP MLD;

[0619] The beacon frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element, or the probe response frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element;

[0620] The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

[0621] In some embodiments, the link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element includes at least one single-site STA overview field;

[0622] Among them, the link identifier field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field are used to jointly indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP collaboration.

[0623] In some embodiments, the link identifier field occupies the first Q1 bits of the single STA summary field, and the link identifier extension field occupies the last Q2 bits of the single STA summary field, where Q1 and Q2 are both positive integers, for example, Q1=4, Q2=4.

[0624] In some embodiments, the first AP determines that the s links are interrupted based on link quality of the s links, or the first AP determines that the s links are interrupted based on location information or displacement information of the first non-AP MLD.

[0625] In some embodiments, the first AP receives second information sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the second information is used to indicate that the s links are interrupted. Optionally, the second information is carried by an interruption frame.

[0626] In some embodiments, the first AP receives third information sent by other APs, where the third information is used to indicate that the s links are interrupted.

[0627] In some embodiments, the second information or the third information includes at least one of the following: identifiers of the s links, and MAC addresses of APs corresponding to the s links.

[0628] In some embodiments, the reconfiguration multi-link element may refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 300, the beacon frame and the probe response frame may refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 300, the TID to link mapping request frame and the TID to link mapping response frame may refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 300, and will not be repeated here.

[0629] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC;

[0630] The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0631] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in the master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0632] In some embodiments, the subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0633] In some embodiments, multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

[0634] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD may be as shown in FIG. 41 , FIG. 42 , or FIG. 43 . For details, reference may be made to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 600 , which will not be repeated here.

[0635] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

[0636] In some embodiments, some of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located with the second virtual AP MLD transmit only control plane information and another part of the links transmit only data plane information, or some or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located with the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0637] In some embodiments, a single subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0638] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0639] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing multi-link connections, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

[0640] Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, non-AP MLD uninterrupted roaming under the second virtual AP MLD can be achieved.

[0641] FIG45 is a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 800 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG45 , the wireless communication method 800 may include at least part of the following contents:

[0642] S810. A first AP sends a data sharing announcement frame to at least one AP, wherein the first AP and the at least one AP both belong to a second virtual AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the at least one AP includes the second AP. The data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and the non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs.

[0643] S820, the second AP receives the data sharing announcement frame sent by the first AP;

[0644] S830: The first AP sends the shared data using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

[0645] S840: The second AP receives the shared data sent by the first AP using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

[0646] In the embodiment of the present application, the operation of the AP in the at least one AP is consistent with that of the second AP. For details, please refer to the second AP and will not be repeated here.

[0647] In some embodiments, an AP may belong to one or more virtual AP MLDs.

[0648] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD should have only one master AP (Master AP), and the remaining APs are slave APs (Slave APs).

[0649] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD may support one or more multi-AP cooperation modes.

[0650] In the embodiments of the present application, a “field” may also be referred to as a “field” or a “subfield.” A field may occupy one or more bytes (byte / octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).

[0651] In some embodiments, the first AP is a master AP. Of course, in some embodiments, the first AP may also be a slave AP, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

[0652] In some embodiments, the data sharing announcement field in the data sharing announcement frame includes a link identification information field and a multi-link device MLD MAC address field;

[0653] The link information field is used to indicate the link information for transmitting the shared data, and the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MAC address of the non-access point multi-link device (non-AP MLD) to which the shared data belongs.

[0654] In some embodiments, the first AP receives acknowledgment ACK frames fed back by some or all of the APs in the at least one AP MLD, where the ACK frames are used to indicate that the corresponding APs have successfully received the shared data.

[0655] In some embodiments, the first AP shares data of at least one non-AP MLD with the at least one AP via a backhaul link.

[0656] In some embodiments, the second AP feeds back an ACK frame to the first AP, where the ACK frame is used to indicate that the second AP has successfully received the shared data.

[0657] In some embodiments, the first AP shares data of at least one non-AP MLD with the second AP via a backhaul link.

[0658] In some embodiments, the frame format of the data sharing announcement frame (Data Sharing Announce frame) can refer to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 400, and will not be repeated here.

[0659] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC;

[0660] The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0661] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in the master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0662] In some embodiments, the subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0663] In some embodiments, multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

[0664] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD may be as shown in FIG. 41 , FIG. 42 , or FIG. 43 . For details, reference may be made to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 600 , which will not be repeated here.

[0665] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

[0666] In some embodiments, some of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located with the second virtual AP MLD transmit only control plane information and another part of the links transmit only data plane information, or some or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located with the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0667] In some embodiments, a single subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0668] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0669] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing multi-link connections, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

[0670] Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, data sharing between multiple AP MLDs under the second virtual AP MLD can be achieved.

[0671] FIG46 is a schematic flowchart of a wireless communication method 900 according to an embodiment of the present application. As shown in FIG46 , the wireless communication method 900 may include at least part of the following contents:

[0672] S910, a first AP sends a multi-AP transmission trigger frame to at least one AP; wherein the first AP and the at least one AP both belong to a second virtual AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, the at least one AP and the first AP jointly participate in multi-AP collaborative transmission for a first non-AP MLD, the at least one AP includes a second AP, and the multi-AP transmission trigger frame is used to indicate links, collaboration modes, and transmission parameters used by each AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD;

[0673] S920: The second AP receives the multi-AP transmission trigger frame sent by the first AP.

[0674] In the embodiment of the present application, the operation of the AP in the at least one AP is consistent with that of the second AP. For details, please refer to the second AP and will not be repeated here.

[0675] In some embodiments, an AP may belong to one or more virtual AP MLDs.

[0676] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD should have only one master AP (Master AP), and the remaining APs are slave APs (Slave APs).

[0677] In some embodiments, each virtual AP MLD may support one or more multi-AP cooperation modes.

[0678] In the embodiments of the present application, a “field” may also be referred to as a “field” or a “subfield.” A field may occupy one or more bytes (byte / octet), or a field may occupy one or more bits (bit).

[0679] In some embodiments, the first AP is a master AP. Of course, in some embodiments, the first AP may also be a slave AP, which is not limited in the embodiments of the present application.

[0680] In some embodiments, the user information field in the multi-AP transmission trigger frame includes an AID field and a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP indicated by the AID field, or the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP indicated by the AID field, or the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP indicated by the AID field.

[0681] In some embodiments, the user information field in the multi-AP transmission trigger frame includes an AID field and a user information field associated with the trigger frame, the user information field associated with the trigger frame includes a multi-link field or a basic multi-link field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, the multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP indicated by the AID field, or the basic multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP indicated by the AID field.

[0682] In some embodiments, the frame format of the multi-AP transmission trigger frame can refer to the relevant description of the frame format of the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame in the above wireless communication method 500, and will not be repeated here.

[0683] In some embodiments, the first AP sends a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP transmission trigger frame.

[0684] In some embodiments, the first AP receives an acknowledgment frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the acknowledgment frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD has successfully received the data frame sent by the first AP.

[0685] In some embodiments, the second AP sends a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP transmission trigger frame.

[0686] In some embodiments, the second AP receives an acknowledgment frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the acknowledgment frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD has successfully received the data frame sent by the second AP.

[0687] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC;

[0688] The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0689] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in the master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper layer MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0690] In some embodiments, the subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0691] In some embodiments, multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

[0692] In some embodiments, the second virtual AP MLD may be as shown in FIG. 41 , FIG. 42 , or FIG. 43 . For details, reference may be made to the relevant description in the above-mentioned wireless communication method 600 , which will not be repeated here.

[0693] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

[0694] In some embodiments, some of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located with the second virtual AP MLD transmit only control plane information and another part of the links transmit only data plane information, or some or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located with the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0695] In some embodiments, a single subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0696] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0697] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing multi-link connections, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

[0698] Therefore, in the embodiment of the present application, multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission under the second virtual AP MLD can be implemented.

[0699] The above text, in combination with Figures 6 to 46, describes in detail the method embodiment of the present application. The following text, in combination with Figures 47 to 65, describes in detail the device embodiment of the present application. It should be understood that the device embodiment and the method embodiment correspond to each other, and similar descriptions can refer to the method embodiment.

[0700] FIG47 shows a schematic block diagram of an AP MLD 1000 according to an embodiment of the present application. The AP MLD 1000 is a first AP MLD. As shown in FIG47 , the AP MLD 1000 includes:

[0701] The communication unit 1010 is configured to send or receive a multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame;

[0702] The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, the frequency band information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the links and / or frequency bands for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection;

[0703] The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, and multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability.

[0704] In some embodiments, the multi-AP MLD detection announcement field in the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame includes at least one of the following: a virtual basic service set identifier VBSSID field, a cooperation set identifier field, a detection method field, and a detection configuration field;

[0705] Among them, the VBSSID field is used to indicate the VBSSID of the first virtual AP MLD, the collaboration set identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the multi-AP MLD collaboration set corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD, the detection method field is used to indicate the method for the multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, and the detection configuration field is used to indicate the configuration information for the multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection.

[0706] In some embodiments, the detection method field includes at least one of: a sequential or joint field, an explicit or implicit field;

[0707] The first value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding in sequence, and the second value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding simultaneously.

[0708] The explicit or implicit field takes a first value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform explicit channel sounding, and the explicit or implicit field takes a second value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform implicit channel sounding.

[0709] In some embodiments, when the order or combination field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding in sequence, the time and / or order in which the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field; or,

[0710] In a case where the order or combination field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously perform channel sounding, the time at which the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

[0711] In some embodiments, the detection configuration field includes at least one of the following: an AP MLD number field, a plurality of AP MLD detection configuration fields;

[0712] The AP MLD quantity field is used to indicate the number of AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the mth AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields is used to indicate configuration information of the mth AP MLD participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0713] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel probing in sequence, the order of the AP MLD probing configuration fields in the multiple AP MLD probing configuration fields indicates the order in which the corresponding AP MLDs perform multi-AP MLD channel probing.

[0714] In some embodiments, the AP MLD detection configuration field in the plurality of AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a basic service set identifier BSSID field, an AP MLD identifier field, a start time field, and a basic multilink element;

[0715] Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performing multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the link information used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0716] In some embodiments, the AP MLD detection configuration field in the plurality of AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP MLD identification field, a start time field, and a link identification information field;

[0717] Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performing multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the link identification information field is used to indicate the link information used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0718] In some embodiments, the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[0719] In which, when the link identification information field includes only the link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes only the link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes the link identification field and the link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0720] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs include the first AP MLD and the multiple AP MLDs perform explicit channel sounding, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send a Null Data Physical Protocol Data Unit Announcement (NDPA) frame to a first non-access point multi-link device (non-AP MLD) according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD sounding announcement frame, wherein the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of an NDP frame to be sent subsequently, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel sounding; and

[0721] The communication unit 1010 is further configured to send a Null Data Physical Protocol Data Unit (NDP) frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein a time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is not less than a short interframe space (SIFS).

[0722] In some embodiments, the NDPA frame includes a non-AP MLD information list field, and the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field;

[0723] In which case, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0724] In some embodiments, when the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD covers all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send a beamforming report polling (BFRP) trigger frame to all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent. The BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection to feed back channel detection results to the AP MLD associated therewith.

[0725] The communication unit 1010 is further configured to receive an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the NDP feedback frame includes a channel sounding result of the first AP MLD.

[0726] In some embodiments, when the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send a BFRP trigger frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result.

[0727] The communication unit 1010 is further configured to receive an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes a channel sounding result of the first AP MLD.

[0728] In some embodiments, the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[0729] In which, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0730] In some embodiments, the NDP feedback frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are jointly used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or,

[0731] The NDP feedback frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

[0732] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames in the order indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frame; or,

[0733] In the case that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frame.

[0734] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs include the first AP MLD and the multiple AP MLDs perform implicit channel probing, the communication unit 1010 is further configured to send a probe trigger frame to a first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD probe announcement frame, wherein the probe trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel probing result, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel probing; and

[0735] The communication unit 1010 is further configured to receive an NDP frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the NDP frame includes a channel sounding result of the first AP MLD.

[0736] In some embodiments, the user information field in the detection trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, wherein the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0737] In some embodiments, the NDP frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs; or,

[0738] The NDP frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

[0739] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel detection to send NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame; or

[0740] In the case that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple AP MLDs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel detection to simultaneously and synchronously send NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame.

[0741] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0742] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC;

[0743] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0744] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0745] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0746] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0747] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0748] In some embodiments, the same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0749] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0750] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput (EHT) non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD supports association with only one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0751] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD.

[0752] In some embodiments, the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input / output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip. The processing unit may be one or more processors.

[0753] It should be understood that the AP MLD 1000 according to the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the first AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and / or functions of each unit in the AP MLD 1000 are respectively for implementing the corresponding process of the first AP MLD in the method 200 shown in Figure 6. For the sake of brevity, they are not further described here.

[0754] FIG48 shows a schematic block diagram of a non-AP MLD 1100 according to an embodiment of the present application. The non-AP MLD 1100 is a first non-AP MLD. As shown in FIG48 , the non-AP MLD 1100 includes:

[0755] The communication unit 1110 is configured to receive a first frame sent by a first access point multi-link device AP MLD;

[0756] The first frame is sent by the first AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the first frame is a null data physical protocol data unit announcement NDPA frame or a detection trigger frame;

[0757] The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, the frequency band information for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the links and / or frequency bands for multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection;

[0758] Wherein, in the case where the first frame is an NDPA frame, the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of a Null Data Physical Protocol Data Unit NDP frame sent subsequently;

[0759] Wherein, in the case that the first frame is a detection trigger frame, the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result.

[0760] In some embodiments, the multi-AP MLD detection announcement field in the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame includes at least one of the following: a virtual basic service set identifier VBSSID field, a cooperation set identifier field, a detection method field, and a detection configuration field;

[0761] Among them, the VBSSID field is used to indicate the VBSSID of the first virtual AP MLD, the collaboration set identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the multi-AP MLD collaboration set corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD, the detection method field is used to indicate the method for the multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection, and the detection configuration field is used to indicate the configuration information for the multiple AP MLDs to perform channel detection.

[0762] In some embodiments, the detection method field includes at least one of: a sequential or joint field, an explicit or implicit field;

[0763] The first value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding in sequence, and the second value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding simultaneously.

[0764] The explicit or implicit field takes a first value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform explicit channel sounding, and the explicit or implicit field takes a second value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform implicit channel sounding.

[0765] In some embodiments, when the order or combination field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding in sequence, the time and / or order in which the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field; or,

[0766] In a case where the order or combination field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously perform channel sounding, the time at which the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

[0767] In some embodiments, the detection configuration field includes at least one of the following: an AP MLD number field, a plurality of AP MLD detection configuration fields;

[0768] The AP MLD quantity field is used to indicate the number of AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the mth AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields is used to indicate configuration information of the mth AP MLD participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0769] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel probing in sequence, the order of the AP MLD probing configuration fields in the multiple AP MLD probing configuration fields indicates the order in which the corresponding AP MLDs perform multi-AP MLD channel probing.

[0770] In some embodiments, the AP MLD detection configuration field in the plurality of AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a basic service set identifier BSSID field, an AP MLD identifier field, a start time field, and a basic multilink element;

[0771] Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performing multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the link information used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0772] In some embodiments, the AP MLD detection configuration field in the plurality of AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP MLD identification field, a start time field, and a link identification information field;

[0773] Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performing multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the link identification information field is used to indicate the link information used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0774] In some embodiments, the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[0775] In which, when the link identification information field includes only the link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes only the link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes the link identification field and the link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0776] In some embodiments, when the first frame is an NDPA frame and the multiple AP MLDs perform explicit channel sounding, the communication unit 1110 is further configured to receive an NDP frame sent by the first AP MLD on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent, wherein the time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is no less than a short interframe space (SIFS).

[0777] In some embodiments, the NDPA frame includes a non-AP MLD information list field, and the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field;

[0778] In which case, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0779] In some embodiments, when the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD covers all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the communication unit 1110 is further configured to receive a beamforming report polling (BFRP) trigger frame sent by the first AP MLD on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent. The BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection to feed back channel detection results to the AP MLD associated therewith.

[0780] The communication unit 1110 is further configured to send an NDP feedback frame to the first AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes a channel sounding result of the first AP MLD.

[0781] In some embodiments, when the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the communication unit 1110 is further configured to receive a BFRP trigger frame sent by the first AP MLD on the channel where the NDPA frame is sent, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result;

[0782] The communication unit 1110 is further configured to send an NDP feedback frame to the first AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes a channel sounding result of the first AP MLD.

[0783] In some embodiments, the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[0784] In which, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0785] In some embodiments, the NDP feedback frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are jointly used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or,

[0786] The NDP feedback frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

[0787] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames in the order indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frame; or,

[0788] In the case that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frame.

[0789] In some embodiments, when the first frame is a detection trigger frame and the multiple AP MLDs perform implicit channel detection, the communication unit 1110 is further configured to send an NDP frame to the first AP MLD, wherein the NDP frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

[0790] In some embodiments, the user information field in the detection trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, wherein the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[0791] In some embodiments, the NDP frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs; or,

[0792] The NDP frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

[0793] In some embodiments, when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel detection to send NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame; or

[0794] In the case that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple AP MLDs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel detection to simultaneously and synchronously send NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame.

[0795] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0796] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC;

[0797] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0798] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0799] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0800] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0801] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0802] In some embodiments, the same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0803] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0804] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput (EHT) non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD supports association with only one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0805] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD.

[0806] In some embodiments, the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input / output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip. The processing unit may be one or more processors.

[0807] It should be understood that the non-AP MLD 1100 according to the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the first non-AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and / or functions of each unit in the non-AP MLD 1100 are respectively for implementing the corresponding process of the first non-AP MLD in the method 200 shown in Figure 6. For the sake of brevity, they are not further described here.

[0808] FIG49 shows a schematic block diagram of an AP MLD 1200 according to an embodiment of the present application. The AP MLD 1200 is a first AP MLD. As shown in FIG49 , the AP MLD 1200 includes:

[0809] The communication unit 1210 is configured to send first information to a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD;

[0810] The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, where s and w are both positive integers.

[0811] In some embodiments, the s links are interrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD, and the w links are uninterrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD.

[0812] In some embodiments, the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and a second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD; or

[0813] The s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0814] In some embodiments, the first information is a traffic identifier TID to link mapping element;

[0815] The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n, where n is a non-negative integer.

[0816] In some embodiments, the link map field of the TID in the link map field of the at least one TID occupies k bytes, where k is a positive integer and k>2.

[0817] In some embodiments, k=32.

[0818] In some embodiments, the first information is carried via a beacon frame or a probe response frame.

[0819] In some embodiments, when the first information is carried by a beacon frame, the beacon frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; or,

[0820] In a case where the first information is carried by a probe response frame, the probe response frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element;

[0821] The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

[0822] In some embodiments, the first information is carried by a TID-to-link mapping request frame;

[0823] Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping request frame includes a TID to link mapping element;

[0824] The first information is the TID-to-link mapping element, which includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n.

[0825] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1210 is further configured to receive a TID-to-link mapping response frame sent by the first non-AP MLD;

[0826] Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping response frame includes a TID to link mapping element;

[0827] The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n.

[0828] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1210 is further configured to send a beacon frame or a probe response frame to the first non-AP MLD;

[0829] The beacon frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element, or the probe response frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element;

[0830] The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

[0831] In some embodiments, the link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element includes at least one single-site STA overview field;

[0832] The link identifier field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field are used to jointly indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration.

[0833] In some embodiments, the link identification field occupies the first Q1 bits of the single STA summary field, and the link identification extension field occupies the last Q2 bits of the single STA summary field, where Q1 and Q2 are both positive integers.

[0834] In some embodiments, the AP MLD 1000 further includes: a processing unit 1220;

[0835] The processing unit 1220 is configured to determine, based on the link qualities of the s links, that an interruption has occurred on the s links, or the processing unit 1220 is configured to determine, based on the location information or displacement information of the first non-AP MLD, that an interruption has occurred on the s links; and / or,

[0836] The communication unit 1210 is further configured to receive second information sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the second information is configured to indicate that the s links are interrupted; and / or,

[0837] The communication unit 1210 is further configured to receive third information sent by other AP MLDs, where the third information is used to indicate that the s links are interrupted.

[0838] In some embodiments, the second information or the third information includes at least one of the following: identifiers of the s links, media access control MAC addresses of AP MLDs corresponding to the s links, and MAC addresses of APs corresponding to the s links.

[0839] In some embodiments, the second information is carried via an interrupt frame.

[0840] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0841] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC;

[0842] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0843] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0844] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0845] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0846] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0847] In some embodiments, the same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0848] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0849] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput (EHT) non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD supports association with only one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0850] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD.

[0851] In some embodiments, the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input / output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip. The processing unit may be one or more processors.

[0852] It should be understood that the AP MLD 1200 according to the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the first AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and / or functions of each unit in the AP MLD 1200 are respectively for implementing the corresponding process of the first AP MLD in the method 300 shown in Figure 20. For the sake of brevity, they are not further described here.

[0853] FIG50 shows a schematic block diagram of a non-AP MLD 1300 according to an embodiment of the present application. The non-AP MLD 1300 is a first non-AP MLD. As shown in FIG50 , the non-AP MLD 1300 includes:

[0854] The communication unit 1310 is configured to receive first information sent by a first access point multi-link device AP MLD;

[0855] The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, where s and w are both positive integers.

[0856] In some embodiments, the s links are interrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD, and the w links are uninterrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD.

[0857] In some embodiments, the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and a second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD; or

[0858] The s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0859] In some embodiments, the first information is a traffic identifier TID to link mapping element;

[0860] The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n, where n is a non-negative integer.

[0861] In some embodiments, the link map field of the TID in the link map field of the at least one TID occupies k bytes, where k is a positive integer and k>2.

[0862] In some embodiments, k=32.

[0863] In some embodiments, the first information is carried via a beacon frame or a probe response frame.

[0864] In some embodiments, when the first information is carried by a beacon frame, the beacon frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; or,

[0865] In a case where the first information is carried by a probe response frame, the probe response frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element;

[0866] The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

[0867] In some embodiments, the first information is carried by a TID-to-link mapping request frame;

[0868] Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping request frame includes a TID to link mapping element;

[0869] The first information is the TID-to-link mapping element, which includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n.

[0870] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1310 is further configured to send a TID-to-link mapping response frame to the first AP MLD;

[0871] Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping response frame includes a TID to link mapping element;

[0872] The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n.

[0873] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1310 is further configured to receive a beacon frame or a probe response frame sent by the first AP MLD;

[0874] The beacon frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element, or the probe response frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element;

[0875] The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

[0876] In some embodiments, the link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element includes at least one single-site STA overview field;

[0877] The link identifier field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field are used to jointly indicate the link identifier of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration.

[0878] In some embodiments, the link identification field occupies the first Q1 bits of the single STA summary field, and the link identification extension field occupies the last Q2 bits of the single STA summary field, where Q1 and Q2 are both positive integers.

[0879] In some embodiments, the interruption of the s links is determined by the first AP MLD based on the link quality of the s links, or the interruption of the s links is determined by the first AP MLD based on the location information or displacement information of the first non-AP MLD; and / or the interruption of the s links is indicated by second information sent by the first non-AP MLD; and / or the interruption of the s links is indicated by third information sent by another AP MLD.

[0880] In some embodiments, the second information or the third information includes at least one of the following: identifiers of the s links, media access control MAC addresses of AP MLDs corresponding to the s links, and MAC addresses of APs corresponding to the s links.

[0881] In some embodiments, the second information is carried via an interrupt frame.

[0882] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0883] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC;

[0884] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0885] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0886] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0887] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0888] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0889] In some embodiments, the same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0890] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0891] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput (EHT) non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD supports association with only one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0892] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD.

[0893] In some embodiments, the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input / output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip. The processing unit may be one or more processors.

[0894] It should be understood that the non-AP MLD 1300 according to the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the first non-AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and / or functions of each unit in the non-AP MLD 1300 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes of the first non-AP MLD in the method 300 shown in Figure 20. For the sake of brevity, they are not further described here.

[0895] FIG51 shows a schematic block diagram of an AP MLD 1400 according to an embodiment of the present application. The AP MLD 1400 is a first AP MLD. As shown in FIG51 , the AP MLD 1400 includes:

[0896] a communication unit 1410 configured to send a data sharing announcement frame to at least one AP MLD, wherein the first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-AP multi-link device (non-AP MLD) to which the shared data belongs; and

[0897] The communication unit 1410 is further configured to send the shared data using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

[0898] In some embodiments, the data sharing announcement field in the data sharing announcement frame includes a link identification information field and a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address field;

[0899] The link information field is used to indicate the link information for transmitting the shared data, and the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MAC address of the non-access point multi-link device (non-AP MLD) to which the shared data belongs.

[0900] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1410 is further configured to receive ACK frames fed back by some or all of the at least one AP MLD, where the ACK frames are used to indicate that the corresponding AP MLD has successfully received the shared data.

[0901] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD shares data of at least one non-AP MLD with the at least one AP MLD through a backhaul link.

[0902] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0903] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC;

[0904] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0905] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0906] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0907] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0908] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0909] In some embodiments, the same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0910] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0911] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput (EHT) non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD supports association with only one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0912] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD.

[0913] In some embodiments, the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input / output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip. The processing unit may be one or more processors.

[0914] It should be understood that the AP MLD 1400 according to the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the first AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and / or functions of each unit in the AP MLD 1400 are respectively for implementing the corresponding process of the first AP MLD in the method 400 shown in Figure 32. For the sake of brevity, they are not further described here.

[0915] FIG52 shows a schematic block diagram of an AP MLD 1500 according to an embodiment of the present application. The AP MLD 1500 is a second AP MLD. As shown in FIG52 , the AP MLD 1500 includes:

[0916] a communication unit 1510 configured to receive a data sharing announcement frame sent by a first AP MLD, wherein the first AP MLD and the second AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-AP multi-link device (non-AP MLD) to which the shared data belongs; and

[0917] The communication unit 1510 is further configured to receive the shared data sent by the first AP MLD using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

[0918] In some embodiments, the data sharing announcement field in the data sharing announcement frame includes a link identification information field and a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address field;

[0919] The link information field is used to indicate the link information for transmitting the shared data, and the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MAC address of the non-access point multi-link device (non-AP MLD) to which the shared data belongs.

[0920] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1510 is further configured to feed back an ACK frame to the first AP MLD, where the ACK frame is used to indicate that the second AP MLD has successfully received the shared data.

[0921] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD shares data of at least one non-AP MLD with the second AP MLD via a backhaul link.

[0922] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0923] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC;

[0924] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0925] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0926] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0927] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0928] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0929] In some embodiments, the same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0930] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0931] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput (EHT) non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD supports association with only one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0932] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD.

[0933] In some embodiments, the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input / output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip. The processing unit may be one or more processors.

[0934] It should be understood that the AP MLD 1500 according to the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the second AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and / or functions of each unit in the AP MLD 1500 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes of the second AP MLD in the method 400 shown in Figure 32. For the sake of brevity, they are not further described here.

[0935] FIG53 shows a schematic block diagram of an AP MLD 1600 according to an embodiment of the present application. The AP MLD 1600 is a first AP MLD. As shown in FIG53 , the AP MLD 1600 includes:

[0936] The communication unit 1610 is configured to send a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame to at least one AP MLD;

[0937] The first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, the at least one AP MLD and the first AP MLD jointly participate in multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes, and transmission parameters used by each AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

[0938] In some embodiments, the user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an association identifier AID field and a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field; or

[0939] The user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an AID field and a trigger frame-related user information field, wherein the trigger frame-related user information field includes a multi-link field or a basic multi-link field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, the multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the basic multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field.

[0940] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1610 is further configured to send a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame.

[0941] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1610 is further configured to receive an acknowledgment frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the acknowledgment frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD has successfully received the data frame sent by the first AP MLD.

[0942] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0943] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC;

[0944] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0945] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0946] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0947] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0948] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0949] In some embodiments, the same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0950] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0951] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput (EHT) non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD supports association with only one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0952] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD.

[0953] In some embodiments, the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input / output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip. The processing unit may be one or more processors.

[0954] It should be understood that the AP MLD 1600 according to the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the first AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and / or functions of each unit in the AP MLD 1600 are respectively for implementing the corresponding process of the first AP MLD in the method 500 shown in Figure 35. For the sake of brevity, they are not further described here.

[0955] FIG54 shows a schematic block diagram of an AP MLD 1700 according to an embodiment of the present application. The AP MLD 1700 is a second AP MLD. As shown in FIG54 , the AP MLD 1700 includes:

[0956] The communication unit 1710 is configured to receive a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame sent by a first AP MLD;

[0957] The first AP MLD and the second AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, the second AP MLD and the first AP MLD jointly participate in multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes, and transmission parameters used by each AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

[0958] In some embodiments, the user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an association identifier AID field and a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field; or

[0959] The user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an AID field and a trigger frame-related user information field, wherein the trigger frame-related user information field includes a multi-link field or a basic multi-link field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, the multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the basic multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field.

[0960] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1710 is further configured to send a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame.

[0961] In some embodiments, the communication unit 1710 is further configured to receive an acknowledgment frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the acknowledgment frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD has successfully received the data frame sent by the second AP MLD.

[0962] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

[0963] In some embodiments, the first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC;

[0964] The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0965] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC is located in any one of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

[0966] In some embodiments, the AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC, and a physical layer.

[0967] In some embodiments, the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

[0968] In some embodiments, a portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information; alternatively, a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of both control plane information and data plane information.

[0969] In some embodiments, the same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0970] In some embodiments, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

[0971] In some embodiments, when the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput (EHT) non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD supports association with only one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

[0972] In some embodiments, the first AP MLD is a master AP MLD.

[0973] In some embodiments, the communication unit may be a communication interface or a transceiver, or an input / output interface of a communication chip or a system on chip. The processing unit may be one or more processors.

[0974] It should be understood that the AP MLD 1700 according to the embodiment of the present application may correspond to the second AP MLD in the method embodiment of the present application, and the above-mentioned and other operations and / or functions of each unit in the AP MLD 1700 are respectively for implementing the corresponding processes of the second AP MLD in the method 500 shown in Figure 35. For the sake of brevity, they are not further described here.

[0975] FIG55 shows a schematic block diagram of an AP 1800 according to an embodiment of the present application. The AP 1800 is a first AP. As shown in FIG55 , the AP 1800 includes:

[0976] The communication unit 1810 is configured to send or receive a multi-AP detection announcement frame;

[0977] The multi-AP detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple APs perform channel detection, the time when multiple APs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple APs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple APs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple APs performing channel detection;

[0978] The first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, and the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

[0979] In some embodiments, the multi-AP detection announcement frame multi-AP detection announcement field includes at least one of the following: a virtual basic service set identifier VBSSID field, a collaboration set identifier field, a detection method field, and a detection configuration field;

[0980] Among them, the VBSSID field is used to indicate the VBSSID of the second virtual AP MLD, the collaboration set identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the multi-AP MLD collaboration set corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD, the detection method field is used to indicate the method for the multiple APs to perform channel detection, and the detection configuration field is used to indicate the configuration information for the multiple APs to perform channel detection.

[0981] In some embodiments, the detection method field includes at least one of: a sequential or joint field, an explicit or implicit field;

[0982] The first value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple APs perform channel sounding in sequence, and the second value of the order or joint field is used to indicate that the multiple APs perform channel sounding simultaneously.

[0983] The explicit or implicit field takes a first value to instruct the multiple APs to perform explicit channel sounding, and the explicit or implicit field takes a second value to instruct the multiple APs to perform implicit channel sounding.

[0984] In some embodiments, when the order or combination field indicates that the multiple APs perform channel sounding in sequence, the time and / or order in which the multiple APs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field; or,

[0985] In a case where the order or combination field indicates that the multiple APs perform channel sounding simultaneously, the time when the multiple APs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

[0986] In some embodiments, the detection configuration field includes at least one of the following: an AP number field, a plurality of AP detection configuration fields;

[0987] The AP number field is used to indicate the number of APs participating in multi-AP channel detection, and the mth AP detection configuration field in the multiple AP detection configuration fields is used to indicate configuration information of the mth AP participating in multi-AP channel detection.

[0988] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the order of the AP detection configuration fields in the multiple AP detection configuration fields indicates the order in which the corresponding APs perform multi-AP channel detection.

[0989] In some embodiments, the AP detection configuration field in the plurality of AP detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a basic service set identifier BSSID field, an AP identifier field, a start time field, and a basic multilink element;

[0990] Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the AP identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field for multi-AP channel detection, and the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the link information used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

[0991] In some embodiments, the AP detection configuration field in the plurality of AP detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP identification field, a start time field, and a link identification information field;

[0992] Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the AP identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field for multi-AP channel detection, and the link identification information field is used to indicate the link information used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

[0993] In some embodiments, the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[0994] Among them, in the case where the link identification information field only includes the link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the link identification information field only includes the link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the link identification information field includes the link identification field and the link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

[0995] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs include the first AP and the multiple APs perform explicit channel sounding, the communication unit 1810 is further configured to send an empty data physical protocol data unit announcement NDPA frame to a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame, wherein the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of an empty data physical protocol data unit NDP frame to be sent thereafter, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel sounding; and

[0996] The communication unit 1810 is further configured to send an NDP frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein a time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is not less than a short interframe space (SIFS).

[0997] In some embodiments, the NDPA frame includes a non-AP MLD information list field, and the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field;

[0998] Among them, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP for multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP for multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the link identifier used by the first AP for multi-AP channel detection.

[0999] In some embodiments, when the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame and the AP co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD covers all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the communication unit 1810 is further configured to send a beamforming report polling BFRP trigger frame to all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection on the channel on which the NDPA frame is sent. The BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection to feedback channel detection results to the AP associated therewith;

[1000] The communication unit 1810 is further configured to receive an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the NDP feedback frame includes a channel sounding result of the first AP.

[1001] In some embodiments, when the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame and the AP co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the communication unit 1810 is further configured to send a BFRP trigger frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback the channel detection result;

[1002] The communication unit 1810 is further configured to receive an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes a channel sounding result of the first AP.

[1003] In some embodiments, the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field;

[1004] In which, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier field, the link identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only the link identifier extension field, the link identifier extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field, the link identifier field and the link identifier extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

[1005] In some embodiments, the NDP feedback frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in a case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or,

[1006] The NDP feedback frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

[1007] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple APs send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame; or,

[1008] In the case where the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame.

[1009] In some embodiments, when the multiple APs include the first AP and the multiple APs perform implicit channel sounding, the communication unit 1810 is further configured to send a detection trigger frame to a first non-AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame, wherein the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel sounding; and

[1010] The communication unit 1810 is further configured to receive an NDP frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the NDP frame includes a channel sounding result of the first AP.

[1011] In some embodiments, the user information field in the detection trigger frame includes a link identification field and a l...

Claims

1. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first access point multi-link device AP MLD sends or receives a multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame; The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection; The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, and multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission.

2. The method according to claim 1, It is characterized in that The multi-AP MLD detection declaration field in the multi-AP MLD detection declaration frame includes at least one of the following: a virtual basic service set identifier VBSSID field, a coordination set identifier field, a detection method field, and a detection configuration field; Among them, the VBSSID field is used to indicate the VBSSID of the first virtual AP MLD, the collaboration set identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the multi-AP MLD collaboration set corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD, the detection method field is used to indicate the method of channel detection performed by the multiple AP MLDs, and the detection configuration field is used to indicate the configuration information of the multiple AP MLDs for channel detection.

3. The method according to claim 2, It is characterized in that The detection method field includes at least one of the following: a sequential or joint field, an explicit or implicit field; The order or joint field takes a first value to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, and the order or joint field takes a second value to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection simultaneously and synchronously; The explicit or implicit field takes a first value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform explicit channel detection, and the explicit or implicit field takes a second value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform implicit channel detection.

4. The method according to claim 3, It is characterized in that In the case where the sequence or joint field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the time and / or sequence of the multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection is indicated by the detection configuration field; or, In a case where the order or combination field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel sounding, the time when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

5. The method according to claim 2, It is characterized in that The detection configuration field includes at least one of the following: an AP MLD quantity field, a plurality of AP MLD detection configuration fields; The AP MLD quantity field is used to indicate the quantity of AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the mth AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields is used to indicate configuration information of the mth AP MLD participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection.

6. The method according to claim 5, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the sequence of the AP MLD detection configuration fields in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields indicates the sequence in which the corresponding AP MLDs perform multi-AP MLD channel detection.

7. The method according to claim 5 or 6, It is characterized in that The AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a basic service set identifier BSSID field, an AP MLD identifier field, a start time field, and a basic multi-link element; Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field to perform multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the link information used by the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

8. The method according to claim 5 or 6, It is characterized in that The AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP MLD identification field, a start time field, and a link identification information field; Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performing multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the link identification information field is used to indicate the link information used by the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

9. The method according to claim 8, It is characterized in that The link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; Among them, when the link identification information field only includes the link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field only includes the link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes the link identification field and the link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

10. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, It is characterized in that In a case where the multiple AP MLDs include the first AP MLD, and the multiple AP MLDs perform explicit channel sounding, the method further includes: The first AP MLD sends an empty data physical protocol data unit announcement NDPA frame to a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, wherein the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of an NDP frame sent later, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection; and The first AP MLD sends a Null Data Physical Protocol Data Unit (NDP) frame to the first non-AP MLD on a channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein a time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is not less than a short interframe space (SIFS).

11. The method according to claim 10, It is characterized in that The NDPA frame includes a non-AP MLD information list field, and the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field; Wherein, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

12. The method according to claim 10 or 11, It is characterized in that In the case where the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, and the first AP MLD covers all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel detection, the method further includes: The first AP MLD sends a beamforming report polling BFRP trigger frame to all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, where the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection to feed back channel detection results to the AP MLD associated therewith; The first AP MLD receives an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the NDP feedback frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

13. The method according to claim 10 or 11, It is characterized in that In the case where the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel detection, the method further includes: The first AP MLD sends a BFRP trigger frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result; The first AP MLD receives an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

14. The method according to claim 12 or 13, It is characterized in that The user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; Wherein, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

15. The method according to claim 12 or 13, It is characterized in that The NDP feedback frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel sounding result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel sounding result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs. In the case where a link identification extension field is included, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel sounding result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, in the case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are jointly used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel sounding result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, The NDP feedback frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

16. The method according to any one of claims 10 to 15, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames in the order indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frames; or, In the case that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frame.

17. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 9, It is characterized in that In a case where the multiple AP MLDs include the first AP MLD, and the multiple AP MLDs perform implicit channel detection, the method further includes: The first AP MLD sends a detection trigger frame to a first non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, wherein the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection; and The first AP MLD receives an NDP frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the NDP frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

18. The method of claim 17, It is characterized in that The user information field in the detection trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, wherein the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identification of the link used when the first AP MLD performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

19. The method of claim 17, It is characterized in that The NDP frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs; or, The NDP frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

20. The method according to any one of claims 17 to 19, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel detection to send NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame; or, In the case that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple AP MLDs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multiple AP MLD channel detection to simultaneously and synchronously send NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frame.

21. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 20, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

22. The method of claim 21, It is characterized in that The first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC; The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

23. The method of claim 22, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC is located in any one AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

24. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 23, It is characterized in that The AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

25. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 24, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

26. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 25, It is characterized in that A portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information, or a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

27. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 26, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish a link with the subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

28. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 27, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

29. The method according to any one of claims 21 to 26, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

30. The method according to any one of claims 1 to 29, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD is a main AP MLD.

31. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD receives a first frame sent by the first access point multi-link device AP MLD; The first frame is sent by the first AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the first frame is an empty data physical protocol data unit announcement NDPA frame or a detection trigger frame; The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection; Wherein, in the case where the first frame is an NDPA frame, the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of a null data physical protocol data unit NDP frame sent thereafter; Wherein, in the case where the first frame is a detection trigger frame, the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feed back a channel detection result.

32. The method of claim 31, It is characterized in that The multi-AP MLD detection declaration field in the multi-AP MLD detection declaration frame includes at least one of the following: a virtual basic service set identifier VBSSID field, a coordination set identifier field, a detection method field, and a detection configuration field; Among them, the VBSSID field is used to indicate the VBSSID of the first virtual AP MLD, the collaboration set identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the multi-AP MLD collaboration set corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD, the detection method field is used to indicate the method of channel detection performed by the multiple AP MLDs, and the detection configuration field is used to indicate the configuration information of the multiple AP MLDs for channel detection.

33. The method of claim 32, It is characterized in that The detection method field includes at least one of the following: a sequential or joint field, an explicit or implicit field; The order or joint field takes a first value to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, and the order or joint field takes a second value to indicate that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection simultaneously and synchronously; The explicit or implicit field takes a first value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform explicit channel detection, and the explicit or implicit field takes a second value to instruct the multiple AP MLDs to perform implicit channel detection.

34. The method of claim 33, It is characterized in that In the case where the sequence or joint field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the time and / or sequence of the multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection is indicated by the detection configuration field; or, In a case where the order or combination field indicates that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel sounding, the time when the multiple AP MLDs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

35. The method of claim 32, It is characterized in that The detection configuration field includes at least one of the following: an AP MLD quantity field, a plurality of AP MLD detection configuration fields; The AP MLD quantity field is used to indicate the quantity of AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the mth AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields is used to indicate configuration information of the mth AP MLD participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection.

36. The method of claim 35, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the sequence of the AP MLD detection configuration fields in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields indicates the sequence in which the corresponding AP MLDs perform multi-AP MLD channel detection.

37. The method of claim 35 or 36, It is characterized in that The AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a basic service set identifier BSSID field, an AP MLD identifier field, a start time field, and a basic multi-link element; Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field to perform multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the link information used by the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

38. The method of claim 35 or 36, It is characterized in that The AP MLD detection configuration field in the multiple AP MLD detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP MLD identification field, a start time field, and a link identification information field; Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the AP MLD identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performing multi-AP MLD channel detection, and the link identification information field is used to indicate the link information used by the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

39. The method of claim 38, It is characterized in that The link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; Among them, when the link identification information field only includes the link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field only includes the link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes the link identification field and the link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used when the AP MLD corresponding to the current AP MLD detection configuration field performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

40. The method of any one of claims 31 to 39, It is characterized in that In a case where the first frame is an NDPA frame and the multiple AP MLDs perform explicit channel detection, the method further includes: The first non-AP MLD receives an NDP frame sent by the first AP MLD on a channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein a time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is not less than a short interframe space SIFS.

41. The method of claim 40, It is characterized in that The NDPA frame includes a non-AP MLD information list field, and the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field; Wherein, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes only a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

42. The method of claim 40 or 41, It is characterized in that In the case where the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, and the first AP MLD covers all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel detection, the method further includes: The first non-AP MLD receives a beamforming report polling BFRP trigger frame sent by the first AP MLD on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, where the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection to feed back channel detection results to the AP MLD associated therewith; The first non-AP MLD sends an NDP feedback frame to the first AP MLD, wherein the NDP feedback frame includes The channel detection result of the first AP MLD is described.

43. The method of claim 40 or 41, It is characterized in that In the case where the first AP MLD sends the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame and the first AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP MLD channel detection, the method further includes: The first non-AP MLD receives a BFRP trigger frame sent by the first AP MLD on a channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feed back a channel detection result; The first non-AP MLD sends an NDP feedback frame to the first AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

44. The method of claim 42 or 43, It is characterized in that The user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; Wherein, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP MLD when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

45. The method of claim 42 or 43, It is characterized in that The NDP feedback frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are jointly used to indicate the identification of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, The NDP feedback frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

46. ​​The method of any one of claims 40 to 45, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames in the order indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frames; or, In the case that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frame.

47. The method of any one of claims 31 to 39, It is characterized in that In a case where the first frame is a detection trigger frame and the multiple AP MLDs perform implicit channel detection, the method further includes: The first non-AP MLD sends an NDP frame to the first AP MLD, wherein the NDP frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP MLD.

48. The method of claim 47, It is characterized in that The user information field in the detection trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, wherein the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identification of the link used when the first AP MLD performs multi-AP MLD channel detection.

49. The method of claim 47, It is characterized in that The NDP frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs; or, The NDP frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

50. The method of any one of claims 47 to 49, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection in sequence according to the multiple AP MLDs. The detection announcement frame triggers all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection to send NDP frames in the order indicated; or, In the case that the multiple AP MLDs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple AP MLDs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multiple AP MLD channel detection to simultaneously and synchronously send NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multiple AP MLD detection announcement frame.

51. The method of any one of claims 31 to 50, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

52. The method of claim 51, It is characterized in that The first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC; The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

53. The method of claim 52, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC is located in any one AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

54. The method of any one of claims 51 to 53, It is characterized in that The AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

55. The method of any one of claims 51 to 54, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

56. The method of any one of claims 51 to 55, It is characterized in that A portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information, or a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

57. The method of any one of claims 51 to 56, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish a link with the subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

58. The method of any one of claims 51 to 57, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

59. The method of any one of claims 51 to 56, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

60. The method of any one of claims 31 to 59, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD is a main AP MLD.

61. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first access point multi-link device AP MLD sends first information to the first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD; The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, where s and w are both positive integers.

62. The method of claim 61, It is characterized in that The s links are interrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD, and the w links are uninterrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD.

63. The method of claim 61 or 62, It is characterized in that The w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and a second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD; or, The s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and a second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD.

64. The method of any one of claims 61 to 63, It is characterized in that The first information is a traffic identifier TID to link mapping element; The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n, where n is a non-negative integer.

65. The method of claim 64, It is characterized in that The link mapping field of a TID in the link mapping field of the at least one TID occupies k bytes, where k is a positive integer and k>2.

66. The method of claim 65, It is characterized in that k＝32。 67. The method of any one of claims 61 to 66, It is characterized in that The first information is carried by a beacon frame or a probe response frame.

68. The method of claim 67, It is characterized in that In the case where the first information is carried by a beacon frame, the beacon frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; or, In the case where the first information is carried by a probe response frame, the probe response frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

69. The method of any one of claims 61 to 66, It is characterized in that The first information is carried by a TID to link mapping request frame; wherein the action field in the TID to link mapping request frame includes a TID to link mapping element; The first information is the TID-to-link mapping element, which includes a link mapping field of at least one TID, and a link mapping field of TID n in the link mapping field of the at least one TID is used to indicate a link mapped by the TID n.

70. The method of claim 69, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP MLD receives a TID-to-link mapping response frame sent by the first non-AP MLD; Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping response frame includes a TID to link mapping element; The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by the TID n.

71. The method of claim 69 or 70, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP MLD sends a beacon frame or a probe response frame to the first non-AP MLD; The beacon frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element, or the probe response frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element; The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

72. The method of claim 68 or 71, It is characterized in that The link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element includes at least one single-site STA overview field; Among them, the link identification field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identification extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identification field and the link identification extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field are used to jointly indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration.

73. The method of claim 72, It is characterized in that The Link Identifier field occupies the first Q of the Single STA Summary field 1 bits, the link identifier extension field occupies the last Q bits of the single STA overview field 2 bits, Q 1 and Q 2 All are positive integers.

74. The method of any one of claims 61 to 73, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP MLD determines that the s links are interrupted according to link qualities of the s links, or the first AP MLD determines that the s links are interrupted according to location information or displacement information of the first non-AP MLD; and / or, The first AP MLD receives second information sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the second information is used to indicate that the s links are interrupted; and / or, The first AP MLD receives third information sent by other AP MLDs, wherein the third information is used to indicate that the s links are interrupted.

75. The method of claim 74, It is characterized in that The second information or the third information includes at least one of the following: identifiers of the s links, media access control MAC addresses of AP MLDs corresponding to the s links, and MAC addresses of APs corresponding to the s links.

76. The method of claim 74 or 75, It is characterized in that The second information is carried by an interrupt frame.

77. The method of any one of claims 61 to 76, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

78. The method of claim 77, It is characterized in that The first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC; The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

79. The method of claim 78, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC is located in any one AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

80. The method of any one of claims 77 to 79, It is characterized in that The AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

81. The method of any one of claims 77 to 80, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

82. The method of any one of claims 77 to 81, It is characterized in that A portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information, or a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

83. The method of any one of claims 77 to 82, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish a link with the subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

84. The method of any one of claims 77 to 83, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

85. The method of any one of claims 77 to 82, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

86. The method of any one of claims 61 to 85, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD is a main AP MLD.

87. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD receives the first information sent by the first access point multi-link device AP MLD; The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, where s and w are both positive integers.

88. The method of claim 87, It is characterized in that The s links are interrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD, and the w links are uninterrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD.

89. The method of claim 87 or 88, It is characterized in that The w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and a second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD; or, The s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and the first AP MLD, and the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and a second AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD.

90. The method of any one of claims 87 to 89, It is characterized in that The first information is a traffic identifier TID to link mapping element; The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n, where n is a non-negative integer.

91. The method of claim 90, It is characterized in that The link mapping field of a TID in the link mapping field of the at least one TID occupies k bytes, where k is a positive integer and k>2.

92. The method of claim 91, It is characterized in that k＝32。 93. The method of any one of claims 87 to 92, It is characterized in that The first information is carried by a beacon frame or a probe response frame.

94. The method of claim 93, It is characterized in that In the case where the first information is carried by a beacon frame, the beacon frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; or, In the case where the first information is carried by a probe response frame, the probe response frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

95. The method of any one of claims 87 to 92, It is characterized in that The first information is carried by a TID to link mapping request frame; wherein the action field in the TID to link mapping request frame includes a TID to link mapping element; The first information is the TID-to-link mapping element, which includes a link mapping field of at least one TID, and a link mapping field of TID n in the link mapping field of the at least one TID is used to indicate a link mapped by the TID n.

96. The method of claim 95, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first non-AP MLD sends a TID-to-link mapping response frame to the first AP MLD; Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping response frame includes a TID to link mapping element; The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by the TID n.

97. The method of claim 95 or 96, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first non-AP MLD receives a beacon frame or a probe response frame sent by the first AP MLD; The beacon frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element, or the probe response frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element; The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

98. The method of claim 94 or 97, It is characterized in that The link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element includes at least one single-site STA overview field; Among them, the link identification field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identification extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identification field and the link identification extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field are used to jointly indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration.

99. The method of claim 98, It is characterized in that The Link Identifier field occupies the first Q of the Single STA Summary field 1 bits, the link identifier extension field occupies the last Q bits of the single STA overview field 2 bits, Q 1 and Q 2 All are positive integers.

100. The method of any one of claims 87 to 99, It is characterized in that The interruption of the s links is determined by the first AP MLD through the link quality of the s links, or the interruption of the s links is determined by the first AP MLD through the location information or displacement information of the first non-AP MLD; and / or the interruption of the s links is indicated by the second information sent by the first non-AP MLD; and / or the interruption of the s links is indicated by the third information sent by other AP MLDs.

101. The method of claim 100, It is characterized in that The second information or the third information includes at least one of the following: identifiers of the s links, media access control MAC addresses of AP MLDs corresponding to the s links, and MAC addresses of APs corresponding to the s links.

102. The method of claim 100 or 101, It is characterized in that The second information is carried by an interrupt frame.

103. The method of any one of claims 87 to 102, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

104. The method of claim 103, It is characterized in that The first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC; The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

105. The method of claim 104, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC is located in any one AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

106. The method of any one of claims 103 to 105, It is characterized in that The AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

107. The method of any one of claims 103 to 106, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

108. The method of any one of claims 103 to 107, It is characterized in that A portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information, or a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

109. The method of any one of claims 103 to 108, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish a link with the subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

110. The method of any one of claims 103 to 109, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

111. The method of any one of claims 103 to 108, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

112. The method of any one of claims 87 to 111, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD is a main AP MLD.

113. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first access point multi-link device AP MLD sends a data sharing announcement frame to at least one AP MLD, wherein the first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and The first AP MLD sends the shared data using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

114. The method of claim 113, It is characterized in that The data sharing announcement field in the data sharing announcement frame includes a link identification information field and a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address field; The link information field is used to indicate the link information for transmitting the shared data, and the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MAC address of a non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs.

115. The method of claim 113 or 114, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP MLD receives an ACK frame fed back by some or all of the at least one AP MLD, where the ACK frame is used to indicate that the corresponding AP MLD successfully receives the shared data.

116. The method of any one of claims 113 to 115, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD shares data of at least one non-AP MLD with the at least one AP MLD through a backhaul link.

117. The method of any one of claims 113 to 116, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

118. The method of claim 117, It is characterized in that The first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC; The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

119. The method of claim 118, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC is located in any one AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

120. The method of any one of claims 117 to 119, It is characterized in that The AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

121. The method of any one of claims 117 to 120, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

122. The method of any one of claims 117 to 121, It is characterized in that A portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information, or a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

123. The method of any one of claims 117 to 122, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish a link with the subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

124. The method of any one of claims 117 to 123, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

125. The method of any one of claims 117 to 122, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

126. The method of any one of claims 113 to 125, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD is a main AP MLD.

127. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The second access point multi-link device AP MLD receives a data sharing announcement frame sent by the first AP MLD, wherein the first AP MLD and the second AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and The second AP MLD receives the shared data sent by the first AP MLD using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

128. The method of claim 127, It is characterized in that The data sharing announcement field in the data sharing announcement frame includes a link identification information field and a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address field; The link information field is used to indicate the link information for transmitting the shared data, and the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MAC address of a non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs.

129. The method of claim 127 or 128, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The second AP MLD feeds back an ACK frame to the first AP MLD, where the ACK frame is used to indicate that the second AP MLD successfully receives the shared data.

130. The method of any one of claims 127 to 129, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD shares data of at least one non-AP MLD with the second AP MLD through a backhaul link.

131. The method of any one of claims 127 to 130, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

132. The method of claim 131, It is characterized in that The first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC; The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

133. The method of claim 132, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC is located in any one AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

134. The method of any one of claims 131 to 133, It is characterized in that The AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

135. The method of any one of claims 131 to 134, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

136. The method of any one of claims 131 to 135, It is characterized in that A portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information, or a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

137. The method of any one of claims 131 to 136, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish a link with the subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

138. The method of any one of claims 131 to 137, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

139. The method of any one of claims 131 to 136, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

140. The method of any one of claims 127 to 139, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD is a main AP MLD.

141. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first access point multi-link device AP MLD sends a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame to at least one AP MLD; Among them, the first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to the first virtual AP MLD, the multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, the at least one AP MLD and the first AP MLD jointly participate in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

142. The method of claim 141, It is characterized in that The user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an association identifier AID field and a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field; or, The user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an AID field and a user information field related to the trigger frame, and the user information field related to the trigger frame includes a multi-link field or a basic multi-link field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the basic multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field.

143. The method of claim 141 or 142, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP MLD sends a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame.

144. The method of claim 143, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP MLD receives a confirmation frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the confirmation frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD has successfully received a data frame sent by the first AP MLD.

145. The method of any one of claims 141 to 144, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

146. The method of claim 145, It is characterized in that The first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC; The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

147. The method of claim 146, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC is located in any one AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

148. The method of any one of claims 145 to 147, It is characterized in that The AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

149. The method of any one of claims 145 to 148, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

150. The method of any one of claims 145 to 149, It is characterized in that A portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information, or a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

151. The method of any one of claims 145 to 150, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish a link with the subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

152. The method of any one of claims 145 to 151, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

153. The method of any one of claims 145 to 150, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the first non-AP MLD corresponds to The link identifier is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

154. The method of any one of claims 141 to 153, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD is a main AP MLD.

155. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The second access point multi-link device AP MLD receives the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame sent by the first AP MLD; Among them, the first AP MLD and the second AP MLD both belong to the first virtual AP MLD, the multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, the second AP MLD and the first AP MLD jointly participate in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

156. The method of claim 155, It is characterized in that The user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an association identifier AID field and a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD cooperative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field; or, The user information field in the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame includes an AID field and a user information field related to the trigger frame, and the user information field related to the trigger frame includes a multi-link field or a basic multi-link field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field, or the basic multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP MLD indicated by the AID field.

157. The method of claim 155 or 156, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The second AP MLD sends a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame.

158. The method of claim 157, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The second AP MLD receives a confirmation frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the confirmation frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD has successfully received a data frame sent by the second AP MLD.

159. The method of any one of claims 155 to 158, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD and one or more AP MLDs together constitute the first virtual AP MLD.

160. The method of claim 159, It is characterized in that The first virtual AP MLD has a virtual multi-link device MLD media access control MAC; The virtual MLD MAC is connected to the MLD upper layer MACs of all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD MAC manages and controls all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

161. The method of claim 160, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC is located in any one AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in a master AP MLD among all AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD MAC is located in an independent control device.

162. The method of any one of claims 159 to 161, It is characterized in that The AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD has an MLD upper layer MAC, a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

163. The method of any one of claims 159 to 162, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the first virtual AP MLD.

164. The method of any one of claims 159 to 163, It is characterized in that A portion of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD transmits only control plane information and another portion of the links transmits only data plane information, or a portion or all of the links established between the first AP MLD and a non-AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

165. The method of any one of claims 159 to 164, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish a link with the subordinate access points AP of multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD.

166. The method of any one of claims 159 to 165, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same physical layer protocol data unit PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the first virtual AP MLD.

167. The method of any one of claims 159 to 164, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an extremely high throughput EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports association with one AP MLD in the first virtual AP MLD and establishment of a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the first virtual AP MLD.

168. The method of any one of claims 159 to 167, It is characterized in that The first AP MLD is a main AP MLD.

169. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first access point AP sends or receives a multi-AP detection announcement frame; The multi-AP detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple APs perform channel detection, the time when multiple APs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple APs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple APs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple APs performing channel detection; The first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, and the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

170. The method of claim 169, It is characterized in that The multi-AP detection announcement frame multi-AP detection announcement field includes at least one of the following: a virtual basic service set identifier VBSSID field, a collaborative set identifier field, a detection method field, and a detection configuration field; Among them, the VBSSID field is used to indicate the VBSSID of the second virtual AP MLD, the collaboration set identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the multi-AP MLD collaboration set corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD, the detection method field is used to indicate the method for the multiple APs to perform channel detection, and the detection configuration field is used to indicate the configuration information for the multiple APs to perform channel detection.

171. The method of claim 170, It is characterized in that The detection method field includes at least one of the following: a sequential or joint field, an explicit or implicit field; The order or joint field takes a first value to indicate that the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, and the order or joint field takes a second value to indicate that the multiple APs perform channel detection simultaneously and synchronously; The explicit or implicit field takes a first value to instruct the multiple APs to perform explicit channel detection, and the explicit or implicit field takes a second value to instruct the multiple APs to perform implicit channel detection.

172. The method of claim 171, It is characterized in that In the case where the sequence or joint field indicates that the multiple APs perform channel sounding in sequence, the time and / or sequence of the multiple APs performing channel sounding is indicated by the detection configuration field; or, In a case where the order or joint field indicates that the multiple APs perform channel sounding simultaneously and synchronously, the time when the multiple APs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

173. The method of claim 170, It is characterized in that The detection configuration field includes at least one of the following: an AP quantity field, a plurality of AP detection configuration fields; The AP quantity field is used to indicate the number of APs participating in multi-AP channel detection, and the mth AP detection configuration field in the multiple AP detection configuration fields is used to indicate the configuration information of the mth AP participating in multi-AP channel detection.

174. The method of claim 173, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the sequence of the AP detection configuration fields in the multiple AP detection configuration fields indicates the sequence in which the corresponding APs perform multi-AP channel detection.

175. The method of claim 173 or 174, It is characterized in that The AP detection configuration field in the multiple AP detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a basic service set identifier BSSID field, an AP identifier field, a start time field, and a basic multi-link element; Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the AP identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field for multi-AP channel detection, and the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the link information used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

176. The method of claim 173 or 174, It is characterized in that The AP detection configuration field in the multiple AP detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP identification field, a start time field, and a link identification information field; Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the AP identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field for multi-AP channel detection, and the link identification information field is used to indicate the link information used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

177. The method of claim 176, It is characterized in that The link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; Among them, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

178. The method of any one of claims 169 to 177, It is characterized in that In a case where the multiple APs include the first AP, and the multiple APs perform explicit channel sounding, the method further includes: The first AP sends an empty data physical protocol data unit announcement NDPA frame to a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame, wherein the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of an empty data physical protocol data unit NDP frame sent thereafter, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection; and The first AP sends an NDP frame to the first non-AP MLD on a channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein a time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is not less than a short interframe space SIFS.

179. The method of claim 178, It is characterized in that The NDPA frame includes a non-AP MLD information list field, and the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field; Wherein, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes only a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes only a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP channel detection.

180. The method of claim 178 or 179, It is characterized in that In the case where the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame, and the APs co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the method further includes: The first AP sends a beamforming report polling BFRP trigger frame to all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, where the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection to feed back channel detection results to the APs associated therewith; The first AP receives an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the NDP feedback frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP.

181. The method of claim 178 or 179, It is characterized in that In the case where the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame and the AP co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the method further includes: The first AP sends a BFRP trigger frame to the first non-AP MLD on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result; The first AP receives an NDP feedback frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the NDP feedback frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP.

182. The method of claim 180 or 181, It is characterized in that The user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; Among them, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

183. The method of claim 180 or 181, It is characterized in that The NDP feedback frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs. The identification of the link to which the channel sounding result belongs; or, in the case where the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identification of the link to which the channel sounding result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, The NDP feedback frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

184. The method of any one of claims 178 to 183, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple APs send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame; or, In the case where the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame.

185. The method of any one of claims 169 to 177, It is characterized in that In a case where the multiple APs include the first AP, and the multiple APs perform implicit channel sounding, the method further includes: The first AP sends a detection trigger frame to a first non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame, wherein the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feedback a channel detection result, and the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection; and The first AP receives an NDP frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the NDP frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP.

186. The method of claim 185, It is characterized in that The user information field in the detection trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, wherein the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate an identifier of a link used when the first AP performs multi-AP channel detection.

187. The method of claim 185, It is characterized in that The NDP frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs; or, The NDP frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

188. The method of any one of claims 185 to 187, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple APs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP channel detection to send NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame; or, In the case where the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple APs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP channel detection to simultaneously and synchronously send NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame.

189. The method of any one of claims 169 to 188, It is characterized in that The second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC; The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

190. The method of claim 189, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper MAC is located at any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at a master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at an independent control device.

191. The method of claim 189 or 190, It is characterized in that The subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

192. The method of claim 191, It is characterized in that Multiple subordinate APs at the same address in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

193. The method of any one of claims 189 to 192, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

194. The method of any one of claims 189 to 193, It is characterized in that A part of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD only transmit control plane information and another part of the links only transmit data plane information, or a part or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

195. The method of any one of claims 189 to 194, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

196. The method of any one of claims 189 to 195, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

197. The method of any one of claims 189 to 194, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

198. The method of any one of claims 169 to 197, It is characterized in that The first AP is a main AP.

199. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD receives a second frame sent by the first access point AP; The second frame is sent by the first AP according to the information indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame, the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the second frame is an empty data physical protocol data unit announcement NDPA frame or a detection trigger frame; The multi-AP detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple APs perform channel detection, the time when multiple APs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple APs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple APs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple APs performing channel detection; Wherein, in the case where the second frame is an NDPA frame, the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of a null data physical protocol data unit NDP frame sent thereafter; Wherein, in the case where the second frame is a detection trigger frame, the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feed back a channel detection result.

200. The method of claim 199, It is characterized in that The multi-AP detection announcement frame multi-AP detection announcement field includes at least one of the following: a virtual basic service set identifier VBSSID field, a collaborative set identifier field, a detection method field, and a detection configuration field; Among them, the VBSSID field is used to indicate the VBSSID of the second virtual AP MLD, the collaboration set identifier field is used to indicate the identifier of the multi-AP MLD collaboration set corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD, the detection method field is used to indicate the method for the multiple APs to perform channel detection, and the detection configuration field is used to indicate the configuration information for the multiple APs to perform channel detection.

201. The method of claim 200, It is characterized in that The detection method field includes at least one of the following: a sequential or joint field, an explicit or implicit field; The order or joint field takes a first value to indicate that the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, and the order or joint field takes a second value to indicate that the multiple APs perform channel detection simultaneously and synchronously; The explicit or implicit field takes a first value to instruct the multiple APs to perform explicit channel detection, and the explicit or implicit field takes a second value to instruct the multiple APs to perform implicit channel detection.

202. The method of claim 201, It is characterized in that In the case where the sequence or joint field indicates that the multiple APs perform channel sounding in sequence, the time and / or sequence of the multiple APs performing channel sounding is indicated by the detection configuration field; or, In a case where the order or joint field indicates that the multiple APs perform channel sounding simultaneously and synchronously, the time when the multiple APs perform channel sounding is indicated by the sounding configuration field.

203. The method of claim 200, It is characterized in that The detection configuration field includes at least one of the following: an AP quantity field, a plurality of AP detection configuration fields; The AP quantity field is used to indicate the number of APs participating in multi-AP channel detection, and the mth AP detection configuration field in the multiple AP detection configuration fields is used to indicate the configuration information of the mth AP participating in multi-AP channel detection.

204. The method of claim 203, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the sequence of the AP detection configuration fields in the multiple AP detection configuration fields indicates the sequence in which the corresponding APs perform multi-AP channel detection.

205. The method of claim 203 or 204, It is characterized in that The AP detection configuration field in the multiple AP detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a basic service set identifier BSSID field, an AP identifier field, a start time field, and a basic multi-link element; Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the AP identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field for multi-AP channel detection, and the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the link information used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

206. The method of claim 203 or 204, It is characterized in that The AP detection configuration field in the multiple AP detection configuration fields includes at least one of the following: a BSSID field, an AP identification field, a start time field, and a link identification information field; Among them, the BSSID field is used to indicate the BSSID of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the AP identification field is used to indicate the identification of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field, the start time field is used to indicate the start time of the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field for multi-AP channel detection, and the link identification information field is used to indicate the link information used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

207. The method of claim 206, It is characterized in that The link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; Among them, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, when the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the AP corresponding to the current AP detection configuration field when performing multi-AP channel detection.

208. The method of any one of claims 199 to 207, It is characterized in that In a case where the second frame is an NDPA frame and the multiple APs perform explicit channel sounding, the method further includes: The first non-AP MLD receives an NDP frame sent by the first AP on a channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein a time interval between the NDP frame and the NDPA frame is not less than a short interframe space SIFS.

209. The method of claim 208, It is characterized in that The NDPA frame includes a non-AP MLD information list field, and the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identifier field and / or a link identifier extension field; Wherein, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes only a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes only a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP channel detection; or, in the case where the non-AP MLD information list field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP channel detection.

210. The method of claim 208 or 209, It is characterized in that In the case where the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame, and the APs co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the method further includes: The first non-AP MLD receives a beamforming report polling BFRP trigger frame sent by the first AP on the channel for sending the NDPA frame, where the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection to feed back channel detection results to the APs associated therewith; The first non-AP MLD sends an NDP feedback frame to the first AP, wherein the NDP feedback frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP.

211. The method of claim 208 or 209, It is characterized in that In the case where the first AP sends the multi-AP detection announcement frame and the AP co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD cannot cover all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the method further includes: The first non-AP MLD receives a BFRP trigger frame sent by the first AP on a channel for sending the NDPA frame, wherein the BFRP trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feed back a channel detection result; The first non-AP MLD sends an NDP feedback frame to the first AP, where the NDP feedback frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP.

212. The method of claim 210 or 211, It is characterized in that The user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; Among them, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes only a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection; or, when the user information field in the BFRP trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link used by the first AP when performing multi-AP MLD channel detection.

213. The method of claim 210 or 211, It is characterized in that The NDP feedback frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, The NDP feedback frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs.

214. The method of any one of claims 208 to 213, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple APs send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame; or, In the case where the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously send NDPA frames and / or NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame.

215. The method of any one of claims 199 to 207, It is characterized in that In a case where the second frame is a detection trigger frame and the multiple APs perform implicit channel detection, the method further includes: The first non-AP MLD sends an NDP frame to the first AP, wherein the NDP frame includes a channel detection result of the first AP.

216. The method of claim 215, It is characterized in that The user information field in the detection trigger frame includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, wherein the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate an identifier of a link used when the first AP performs multi-AP channel detection.

217. The method of claim 215, It is characterized in that The NDP frame includes a link identification information field, wherein the link identification information field includes a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field; when the link identification information field only includes a link identification field, the link identification field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field only includes a link identification extension field, the link identification extension field is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP feedback frame belongs; or, when the link identification information field includes a link identification field and a link identification extension field, the link identification field and the link identification extension field are used to jointly indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs; or, The NDP frame includes a multi-link element or a basic multi-link element, wherein the link identification information field in the multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs, or the link identification information field in the basic multi-link element is used to indicate the identifier of the link to which the channel detection result carried in the NDP frame belongs.

218. The method of any one of claims 215 to 217, It is characterized in that In the case where the multiple APs perform channel detection in sequence, the multiple APs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP channel detection to send NDP frames in the order indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame; or, In the case where the multiple APs simultaneously and synchronously perform channel detection, the multiple APs trigger all non-AP MLDs participating in the multi-AP channel detection to simultaneously and synchronously send NDP frames according to the start time indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame.

219. The method of any one of claims 199 to 218, It is characterized in that The second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC; The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

220. The method of claim 219, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper MAC is located at any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at a master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at an independent control device.

221. The method of claim 219 or 220, It is characterized in that The subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

222. The method of claim 221, It is characterized in that Multiple subordinate APs at the same address in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

223. The method of any one of claims 219 to 222, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

224. The method of any one of claims 219 to 223, It is characterized in that A part of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD only transmit control plane information and another part of the links only transmit data plane information, or a part or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

225. The method of any one of claims 219 to 224, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

226. The method of any one of claims 219 to 225, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

227. The method of any one of claims 219 to 224, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

228. The method of any one of claims 199 to 227, It is characterized in that The first AP is a main AP.

229. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first access point AP sends first information to a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD; The first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, the first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and s and w are both positive integers.

230. The method of claim 229, It is characterized in that The s links are interrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD, and the w links are uninterrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD.

231. The method of claim 229 or 230, It is characterized in that The w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP in the second virtual AP MLD that is co-located with the first AP, and the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP in the second virtual AP MLD that is co-located with the second AP; or, The s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD, and the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP co-located with the second AP in the second virtual AP MLD.

232. The method of any one of claims 229 to 231, It is characterized in that The first information is a traffic identifier TID to link mapping element; The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n, where n is a non-negative integer.

233. The method of claim 232, It is characterized in that The link mapping field of a TID in the link mapping field of the at least one TID occupies k bytes, where k is a positive integer and k>2.

234. The method of claim 233, It is characterized in that k＝32。 235. The method of any one of claims 229 to 234, It is characterized in that The first information is carried by a beacon frame or a probe response frame.

236. The method of claim 235, It is characterized in that In the case where the first information is carried by a beacon frame, the beacon frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; or, In the case where the first information is carried by a probe response frame, the probe response frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

237. The method of any one of claims 229 to 234, It is characterized in that The first information is carried by a TID to link mapping request frame; wherein the action field in the TID to link mapping request frame includes a TID to link mapping element; The first information is the TID-to-link mapping element, which includes a link mapping field of at least one TID, and a link mapping field of TID n in the link mapping field of the at least one TID is used to indicate a link mapped by the TID n.

238. The method of claim 237, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP receives a TID-to-link mapping response frame sent by the first non-AP MLD; Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping response frame includes a TID to link mapping element; The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by the TID n.

239. The method of claim 237 or 238, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP sends a beacon frame or a probe response frame to the first non-AP MLD; The beacon frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element, or the probe response frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element; The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

240. The method of claim 236 or 239, It is characterized in that The link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element includes at least one single-site STA overview field; Among them, the link identification field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identification extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identification field and the link identification extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field are used to jointly indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP collaboration.

241. The method of claim 240, It is characterized in that The Link Identifier field occupies the first Q of the Single STA Summary field 1 bits, the link identifier extension field occupies the last Q bits of the single STA overview field 2 bits, Q 1 and Q 2 All are positive integers.

242. The method of any one of claims 229 to 241, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP determines that the s links are interrupted according to link qualities of the s links, or the first AP determines that the s links are interrupted according to location information or displacement information of the first non-AP MLD; and / or, The first AP receives second information sent by the first non-AP MLD, wherein the second information is used to indicate that the s links are interrupted; and / or, The first AP receives third information sent by other APs, wherein the third information is used to indicate that the s links are interrupted.

243. The method of claim 242, It is characterized in that The second information or the third information includes at least one of the following: identifiers of the s links, and media access control MAC addresses of APs corresponding to the s links.

244. The method of claim 242 or 243, It is characterized in that The second information is carried by an interrupt frame.

245. The method of any one of claims 229 to 244, It is characterized in that The second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC; The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

246. The method of claim 245, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper MAC is located at any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at a master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at an independent control device.

247. The method of claim 245 or 246, It is characterized in that The subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

248. The method of claim 247, It is characterized in that Multiple subordinate APs at the same address in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

249. The method of any one of claims 245 to 248, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

250. The method of any one of claims 245 to 249, It is characterized in that A part of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD only transmit control plane information and another part of the links only transmit data plane information, or a part or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

251. The method of any one of claims 245 to 250, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

252. The method of any one of claims 245 to 251, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

253. The method of any one of claims 245 to 250, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

254. The method of any one of claims 229 to 253, It is characterized in that The first AP is a main AP.

255. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD receives the first information sent by the first access point AP; The first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, the first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and s and w are both positive integers.

256. The method of claim 255, It is characterized in that The s links are interrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD, and the w links are uninterrupted links corresponding to the first non-AP MLD.

257. The method of claim 255 or 256, It is characterized in that The w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP in the second virtual AP MLD that is co-located with the first AP, and the s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP in the second virtual AP MLD that is co-located with the second AP; or, The s links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP co-located with the first AP in the second virtual AP MLD, and the w links are links established between the first non-AP MLD and an AP co-located with the second AP in the second virtual AP MLD.

258. The method of any one of claims 255 to 257, It is characterized in that The first information is a traffic identifier TID to link mapping element; The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by TID n, where n is a non-negative integer.

259. The method of claim 258, It is characterized in that The link mapping field of a TID in the link mapping field of the at least one TID occupies k bytes, where k is a positive integer and k>2.

260. The method of claim 259, It is characterized in that k＝32。 261. The method of any one of claims 255 to 260, It is characterized in that The first information is carried by a beacon frame or a probe response frame.

262. The method of claim 261, It is characterized in that In the case where the first information is carried by a beacon frame, the beacon frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; or, In the case where the first information is carried by a probe response frame, the probe response frame further includes a reconfiguration multilink element; The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

263. The method of any one of claims 255 to 260, It is characterized in that The first information is carried by a TID to link mapping request frame; wherein the action field in the TID to link mapping request frame includes a TID to link mapping element; The first information is the TID-to-link mapping element, the TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the TID n Mapped link.

264. The method of claim 263, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first non-AP MLD sends a TID-to-link mapping response frame to the first AP; Wherein, the action field in the TID to link mapping response frame includes a TID to link mapping element; The TID-to-link mapping element includes at least one TID link mapping field, and the link mapping field of TID n in the at least one TID link mapping field is used to indicate the link mapped by the TID n.

265. The method of claim 263 or 264, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first non-AP MLD receives a beacon frame or a probe response frame sent by the first AP; The beacon frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element, or the probe response frame includes a reconfiguration multilink element; The reconfiguration multi-link element is used to announce the release or disconnection of the connection between the subordinate APs corresponding to the s links.

266. The method of claim 262 or 265, It is characterized in that The link information field of the reconfiguration multilink element includes at least one single-site STA overview field; Among them, the link identification field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identification extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field is used to indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP MLD collaboration, or the link identification field and the link identification extension field in the single STA overview field in the at least one single STA overview field are used to jointly indicate the link identification of the STA reported in multi-AP collaboration.

267. The method of claim 266, It is characterized in that The Link Identifier field occupies the first Q of the Single STA Summary field 1 bits, the link identifier extension field occupies the last Q bits of the single STA overview field 2 bits, Q 1 and Q 2 All are positive integers.

268. The method of any one of claims 255 to 267, It is characterized in that The interruption of the s links is determined by the first AP through the link quality of the s links, or the interruption of the s links is determined by the first AP through the location information or displacement information of the first non-AP MLD; and / or, The interruption of the s links is indicated by the second information sent by the first non-AP MLD; and / or, The interruption of the s links is indicated by the third information sent by other APs.

269. The method of claim 268, It is characterized in that The second information or the third information includes at least one of the following: identifiers of the s links, and media access control MAC addresses of APs corresponding to the s links.

270. The method of claim 268 or 269, It is characterized in that The second information is carried by an interrupt frame.

271. The method of any one of claims 255 to 270, It is characterized in that The second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC; The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

272. The method of claim 271, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper MAC is located at any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at a master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at an independent control device.

273. The method of claim 271 or 272, It is characterized in that The subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

274. The method of claim 273, It is characterized in that Multiple subordinate APs at the same address in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

275. The method of any one of claims 271 to 274, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

276. The method of any one of claims 271 to 275, It is characterized in that A part of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD only transmit control plane information and another part of the links only transmit data plane information, or a part or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

277. The method of any one of claims 271 to 276, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

278. The method of any one of claims 271 to 277, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same multiple links corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD PPDU, or, the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

279. The method of any one of claims 271 to 276, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

280. The method of any one of claims 255 to 279, It is characterized in that The first AP is a main AP.

281. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: A first access point AP sends a data sharing announcement frame to at least one AP, wherein the first AP and the at least one AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and The first AP sends the shared data using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

282. The method of claim 281, It is characterized in that The data sharing announcement field in the data sharing announcement frame includes a link identification information field and a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address field; The link information field is used to indicate the link information for transmitting the shared data, and the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MAC address of a non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs.

283. The method of claim 281 or 282, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP receives confirmation ACK frames fed back by some or all of the APs in the at least one AP MLD, where the ACK frames are used to indicate that the corresponding AP successfully receives the shared data.

284. The method of any one of claims 281 to 283, It is characterized in that The first AP shares data of at least one non-AP MLD with the at least one AP through a backhaul link.

285. The method of any one of claims 281 to 284, It is characterized in that The second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC; The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

286. The method of claim 285, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper MAC is located at any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at a master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at an independent control device.

287. The method of claim 285 or 286, It is characterized in that The subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

288. The method of claim 287, It is characterized in that Multiple subordinate APs at the same address in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

289. The method of any one of claims 285 to 288, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

290. The method of any one of claims 285 to 289, It is characterized in that A part of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD only transmit control plane information and another part of the links only transmit data plane information, or a part or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

291. The method of any one of claims 285 to 290, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

292. The method of any one of claims 285 to 291, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

293. The method of any one of claims 285 to 290, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing a multi-link connection, and the link label corresponding to the first non-AP MLD The identification is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

294. The method of any one of claims 281 to 293, It is characterized in that The first AP is a main AP.

295. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The second access point AP receives a data sharing announcement frame sent by the first AP, wherein the first AP and the second AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and The second AP receives the shared data sent by the first AP using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

296. The method of claim 295, It is characterized in that The data sharing announcement field in the data sharing announcement frame includes a link identification information field and a multi-link device MLD media access control MAC address field; The link information field is used to indicate the link information for transmitting the shared data, and the MLD MAC address field is used to indicate the MAC address of a non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs.

297. The method of claim 295 or 296, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The second AP feeds back an ACK frame to the first AP, where the ACK frame is used to indicate that the second AP successfully receives the shared data.

298. The method of any one of claims 295 to 297, It is characterized in that The first AP shares data of at least one non-AP MLD with the second AP through a backhaul link.

299. The method of any one of claims 295 to 298, It is characterized in that The second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC; The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

300. The method of claim 299, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper MAC is located at any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at a master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at an independent control device.

301. The method of claim 299 or 300, It is characterized in that The subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

302. The method of claim 301, It is characterized in that Multiple subordinate APs at the same address in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

303. The method of any one of claims 299 to 302, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

304. The method of any one of claims 299 to 303, It is characterized in that A part of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD only transmit control plane information and another part of the links only transmit data plane information, or a part or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

305. The method of any one of claims 299 to 304, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

306. The method of any one of claims 299 to 305, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

307. The method of any one of claims 299 to 304, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

308. The method of any one of claims 295 to 307, It is characterized in that The first AP is a main AP.

309. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The first access point AP sends a multi-AP transmission trigger frame to at least one AP; The first AP and the at least one AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, the at least one AP and the first AP jointly participate in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

310. The method of claim 309, It is characterized in that The user information field in the multi-AP transmission trigger frame includes an association identifier AID field and a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the link identification field is used to indicate the link identification used by the AP indicated by the AID field, or the link identification extension field is used to indicate the link identification used by the AP indicated by the AID field, or the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the link identification used by the AP indicated by the AID field; or, The user information field in the multi-AP transmission trigger frame includes an AID field and a user information field associated with the trigger frame, and the user information field associated with the trigger frame includes a multi-link field or a basic multi-link field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP indicated by the AID field, or the basic multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP indicated by the AID field.

311. The method of claim 309 or 310, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP sends a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP transmission trigger frame.

312. The method of claim 311, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The first AP receives a confirmation frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the confirmation frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD successfully receives the data frame sent by the first AP.

313. The method of any one of claims 309 to 312, It is characterized in that The second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC; The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

314. The method of claim 313, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper MAC is located at any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at a master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at an independent control device.

315. The method of claim 313 or 314, It is characterized in that The subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

316. The method of claim 315, It is characterized in that Multiple subordinate APs at the same address in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

317. The method of any one of claims 313 to 316, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

318. The method of any one of claims 313 to 317, It is characterized in that A part of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD only transmit control plane information and another part of the links only transmit data plane information, or a part or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

319. The method of any one of claims 313 to 318, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

320. The method of any one of claims 313 to 319, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

321. The method of any one of claims 313 to 318, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

322. The method of any one of claims 309 to 321, It is characterized in that The first AP is a main AP.

323. A method of wireless communication, It is characterized in that include: The second access point AP receives the multi-AP transmission trigger frame sent by the first AP; Among them, the first AP and the second AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, the second AP and the first AP jointly participate in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

324. The method of claim 323, It is characterized in that The user information field in the multi-AP transmission trigger frame includes an association identifier AID field and a link identification field and / or a link identification extension field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the link identification field is used to indicate the link identification used by the AP indicated by the AID field, or the link identification extension field is used to indicate the link identification used by the AP indicated by the AID field, or the link identification field and the link identification extension field jointly indicate the link identification used by the AP indicated by the AID field; or, The user information field in the multi-AP transmission trigger frame includes an AID field and a user information field associated with the trigger frame, and the user information field associated with the trigger frame includes a multi-link field or a basic multi-link field, wherein the AID field is used to indicate the address of the AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP indicated by the AID field, or the basic multi-link field indicates the identifier of the link used by the AP indicated by the AID field.

325. The method of claim 323 or 324, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The second AP sends a data frame to the first non-AP MLD according to the information indicated by the multi-AP transmission trigger frame.

326. The method of claim 325, It is characterized in that The method further comprises: The second AP receives a confirmation frame sent by the first non-AP MLD, where the confirmation frame is used to indicate that the first non-AP MLD successfully receives a data frame sent by the second AP.

327. The method of any one of claims 323 to 326, It is characterized in that The second virtual AP MLD has a virtual MLD upper layer MAC; The virtual MLD upper MAC is connected to the MLD lower MACs of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the virtual MLD upper MAC manages and controls all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

328. The method of claim 327, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper MAC is located at any one of all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at a master AP among all subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD, or the virtual MLD upper MAC is located at an independent control device.

329. The method of claim 327 or 328, It is characterized in that The subordinate AP in the second virtual AP MLD has a non-MLD upper layer MAC, an MLD lower layer MAC and a physical layer.

330. The method of claim 329, It is characterized in that Multiple subordinate APs at the same address in the second virtual AP MLD share one MLD upper layer MAC.

331. The method of any one of claims 327 to 330, It is characterized in that The virtual MLD upper layer MAC of the second virtual AP MLD manages link allocation of the entire VBSS corresponding to the second virtual AP MLD.

332. The method of any one of claims 327 to 331, It is characterized in that A part of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD only transmit control plane information and another part of the links only transmit data plane information, or a part or all of the links established between a non-AP MLD and multiple subordinate APs co-located in the second virtual AP MLD allow transmission of control plane information and data plane information.

333. The method of any one of claims 327 to 332, It is characterized in that The same subordinate station STA of a non-AP MLD is allowed to establish links with multiple non-co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

334. The method of any one of claims 327 to 333, It is characterized in that The same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits the same PPDU on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD, or the same subordinate STA of a non-AP MLD transmits different PPDUs on the corresponding multiple links in the second virtual AP MLD.

335. The method of any one of claims 327 to 332, It is characterized in that In the case where the first non-AP MLD is an EHT non-AP MLD, the first non-AP MLD only supports associating with a group of co-located subordinate APs in the second virtual AP MLD and establishing a multi-link connection, and the link identifier corresponding to the first non-AP MLD is allocated by the virtual MLD MAC of the second virtual AP MLD.

336. The method of any one of claims 232 to 335, It is characterized in that The first AP is a main AP.

337. An access point multi-link device AP MLD, It is characterized in that The AP MLD is a first AP MLD, and the AP MLD includes: A communication unit, used to send or receive a multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame; The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection; The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, and multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission.

338. A non-AP MLD, It is characterized in that The non-AP MLD is a first non-AP MLD, and the non-AP MLD includes: A communication unit, configured to receive a first frame sent by a first access point multi-link device AP MLD; The first frame is sent by the first AP MLD according to information indicated by the multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame, the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP MLD among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP MLD channel detection, the first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission capability, and the first frame is an empty data physical protocol data unit announcement NDPA frame or a detection trigger frame; The multi-AP MLD detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the time when multiple AP MLDs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple AP MLDs performing channel detection; Wherein, in the case where the first frame is an NDPA frame, the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of a null data physical protocol data unit NDP frame sent thereafter; Wherein, in the case where the first frame is a detection trigger frame, the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feed back a channel detection result.

339. An access point multi-link device AP MLD, It is characterized in that The AP MLD is a first AP MLD, and the AP MLD includes: A communication unit, configured to send first information to a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD; The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, where s and w are both positive integers.

340. A non-AP MLD, It is characterized in that The non-AP MLD is a first non-AP MLD, and the non-AP MLD includes: A communication unit, configured to receive first information sent by a first access point multi-link device AP MLD; The first AP MLD belongs to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, where s and w are both positive integers.

341. An access point multi-link device AP MLD, It is characterized in that The AP MLD is a first AP MLD, and the AP MLD includes: a communication unit, configured to send a data sharing announcement frame to at least one AP MLD, wherein the first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and The communication unit is further configured to send the shared data using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

342. An access point multi-link device AP MLD, It is characterized in that The AP MLD is a second AP MLD, and the AP MLD includes: a communication unit, configured to receive a data sharing announcement frame sent by a first AP MLD, wherein the first AP MLD and the second AP MLD both belong to a first virtual AP MLD, a plurality of AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have a capability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and The communication unit is further configured to receive the shared data sent by the first AP MLD using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

343. An access point multi-link device AP MLD, It is characterized in that The AP MLD is a first AP MLD, and the AP MLD includes: A communication unit, configured to send a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame to at least one AP MLD; Among them, the first AP MLD and the at least one AP MLD both belong to the first virtual AP MLD, the multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, the at least one AP MLD and the first AP MLD jointly participate in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

344. An access point multi-link device AP MLD, It is characterized in that The AP MLD is a second AP MLD, and the AP MLD includes: A communication unit, configured to receive a multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame sent by a first AP MLD; Among them, the first AP MLD and the second AP MLD both belong to the first virtual AP MLD, the multiple AP MLDs in the first virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission, the second AP MLD and the first AP MLD jointly participate in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP MLD transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP MLD participating in the multi-AP MLD collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

345. An access point AP, It is characterized in that The AP is a first AP, and the AP includes: A communication unit, used to send or receive multiple AP detection announcement frames; The multi-AP detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple APs perform channel detection, the time when multiple APs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple APs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple APs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple APs performing channel detection; The first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, and the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD.

346. A non-AP MLD, It is characterized in that The non-AP MLD is a first non-AP MLD, and the non-AP MLD includes: A communication unit, configured to receive a second frame sent by a first access point AP; The second frame is sent by the first AP according to the information indicated by the multi-AP detection announcement frame, the first non-AP MLD is a non-AP MLD associated with the first AP among all non-AP MLDs participating in multi-AP channel detection, the first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the second frame is an empty data physical protocol data unit announcement NDPA frame or a detection trigger frame; The multi-AP detection announcement frame is used to indicate at least one of the following: the order in which multiple APs perform channel detection, the time when multiple APs perform channel detection, the link information of multiple APs performing channel detection, the frequency band information of multiple APs performing channel detection, and the channel information corresponding to the link and / or frequency band of multiple APs performing channel detection; Wherein, in the case where the second frame is an NDPA frame, the NDPA frame is used to indicate parameters and configuration information of a null data physical protocol data unit NDP frame sent thereafter; Wherein, in the case where the second frame is a detection trigger frame, the detection trigger frame is used to trigger or request the first non-AP MLD to feed back a channel detection result.

347. An access point AP, It is characterized in that The AP is a first AP, and the AP includes: A communication unit, configured to send first information to a first non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD; The first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, the first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and s and w are both positive integers.

348. A non-AP MLD, It is characterized in that The non-AP MLD is a first non-AP MLD, and the non-AP MLD includes: A communication unit, configured to receive first information sent by a first access point AP; The first information is used to request or instruct the first non-AP MLD to remap data on s links to w links, the first AP belongs to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and s and w are both positive integers.

349. An access point AP, It is characterized in that The AP is a first AP, and the AP includes: A communication unit, configured to send a data sharing announcement frame to at least one AP, wherein the first AP and the at least one AP All belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a multi-AP collaborative transmission capability, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and The communication unit is further configured to send the shared data using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

350. An access point AP, It is characterized in that The AP is a second AP, and the AP includes: a communication unit, configured to receive a data sharing announcement frame sent by a first AP, wherein the first AP and the second AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, a plurality of APs in the second virtual AP MLD have a capability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the plurality of APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, and the data sharing announcement frame is used to indicate link information for transmitting shared data and a non-access point multi-link device non-AP MLD to which the shared data belongs; and The communication unit is further configured to receive the shared data sent by the first AP using the link indicated by the data sharing announcement frame.

351. An access point AP, It is characterized in that The AP is a first AP, and the AP includes: A communication unit, configured to send a multi-AP transmission trigger frame to at least one AP; The first AP and the at least one AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the capability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, the at least one AP and the first AP jointly participate in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD.

352. An access point AP, It is characterized in that The AP is a second AP, and the AP includes: A communication unit, configured to receive a multi-AP transmission trigger frame sent by a first AP; Among them, the first AP and the second AP both belong to a second virtual access point multi-link device AP MLD, the multiple APs in the second virtual AP MLD have the ability of multi-AP collaborative transmission, the multiple APs are non-co-located subsidiary APs in the second virtual AP MLD, the second AP and the first AP jointly participate in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD, and the multi-AP transmission trigger frame is used to indicate the links, collaboration modes and transmission parameters used by each AP participating in the multi-AP collaborative transmission for the first non-AP MLD. 353.A AP MLD, It is characterized in that include: A processor and a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program, the processor being used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP MLD performs the method as described in any one of claims 1 to 30, or the AP MLD performs the method as described in any one of claims 61 to 86, or the AP MLD performs the method as described in any one of claims 113 to 168.

354. An AP, It is characterized in that include: A processor and a memory, the memory being used to store a computer program, the processor being used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the AP executes the method as described in any one of claims 169 to 198, or the AP executes the method as described in any one of claims 229 to 254, or the AP executes the method as described in any one of claims 281 to 336. 355.A non-AP MLD, It is characterized in that include: A processor and a memory, wherein the memory is used to store a computer program, and the processor is used to call and run the computer program stored in the memory, so that the non-AP MLD performs the method as described in any one of claims 31 to 60, or the non-AP MLD performs the method as described in any one of claims 87 to 112, or the non-AP MLD performs the method as described in any one of claims 199 to 228, or the non-AP MLD performs the method as described in any one of claims 255 to 280.

356. A chip, It is characterized in that The method comprises: a processor for calling and running a computer program from a memory, so that a device equipped with the chip performs a method as claimed in any one of claims 1 to 30, or a method as claimed in any one of claims 31 to 60, or a method as claimed in any one of claims 61 to 86, or a method as claimed in any one of claims 87 to 112, or a method as claimed in any one of claims 113 to 126, or a method as claimed in any one of claims 127 to 140, or a method as claimed in any one of claims 141 to 154, or a method as claimed in any one of claims 155 to 168. The method described in item 1, or the device installed with the chip performs the method described in any one of claims 169 to 198, or the device installed with the chip performs the method described in any one of claims 199 to 228, or the device installed with the chip performs the method described in any one of claims 229 to 254, or the device installed with the chip performs the method described in any one of claims 255 to 280, or the device installed with the chip performs the method described in any one of claims 281 to 294, or the device installed with the chip performs the method described in any one of claims 295 to 308, or the device installed with the chip performs the method described in any one of claims 309 to 322, or the device installed with the chip performs the method described in any one of claims 323 to 336.

357. A computer-readable storage medium, It is characterized in that for storing a computer program, when the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 30 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 31 to 60 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 61 to 86 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 87 to 112 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 113 to 126 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 127 to 140 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 141 to 154 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 155 to 168 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 169 to 198 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 199 to 228 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 229 to 254 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 255 to 280 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 281 to 294 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 295 to 308 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 309 to 322 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 323 to 336 is implemented.

358. A computer program product, It is characterized in that comprising computer program instructions, which, when executed, implement the method according to any one of claims 1 to 30, or the method according to any one of claims 31 to 60, or the method according to any one of claims 61 to 86, or the method according to any one of claims 87 to 112, or the method according to any one of claims 113 to 126, or the method according to any one of claims 127 to 140, or the method according to any one of claims 141 to 154, or the method according to any one of claims 155 to 168, or the method according to any one of claims 169 to 198, or the method according to any one of claims 199 to 228, or the method according to any one of claims 229 to 254, or the method according to any one of claims 255 to 280, or the method according to any one of claims 281 to 294, or the method according to any one of claims 295 to 308, or the method according to any one of claims 309 to 322, or the method according to any one of claims 323 to 336.

359. A computer program, It is characterized in that When the computer program is executed, the method according to any one of claims 1 to 30 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 31 to 60 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 61 to 86 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 87 to 112 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 113 to 126 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 127 to 140 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 141 to 154 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 155 to 168 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 169 to 198 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 199 to 228 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 229 to 254 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 255 to 280 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 281 to 294 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 295 to 308 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 309 to 322 is implemented, or the method according to any one of claims 323 to 336 is implemented.

Images